FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF USER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF USER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF MANUAL
If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.
How can I correct interference if my equipment causes harmful interference to radio or television reception?
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.
What are the handling precautions for the MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio?
The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets IP67 specifications. Here are some basic handling precautions:
• Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in a service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio.
• If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance.
• If your radio’s battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio and the battery before attaching the battery to radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio.
• If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery.
• To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water).
• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into radio and your radio’s submersibility may be lost.
• Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label.
• Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent.
• Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to your radio.
• When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio.
How does IP Site Connect work?
IP Site Connect allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site by connecting to different available sites using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site mode.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions. This is done either automatically or manually depending on your settings.
In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater.
Can Scan and Roam be enabled at the same time on a channel with IP Site Connect?
No, each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time.
Can I manually add or delete an entry in the roam list for IP Site Connect?
No, you cannot manually add or delete an entry in the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
What should I do if I hear a negative indicator tone when trying to access a feature on Capacity Plus–Single-Site?
You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus–Single-Site by using a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration.
How does the radio connect to sites in Capacity Plus–Multi-Site?
Capacity Plus–Multi-Site allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site by connecting to different available sites which are connected with an IP network.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually.
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest RSSI value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it.
Can I manually add or delete an entry to the roam list in Capacity Plus–Multi-Site?
No, you cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
What happens if I try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus–Multi-Site?
Similar to Capacity Plus–Single Site, icons of features not applicable to Capacity Plus–Multi-Site are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus–Multi-Site by using a programmable button press.
How do I charge the battery for my radio?
Your radio is powered by a Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery.
• To comply with warranty terms and avoid damages, charge the battery using a Motorola Solutions charger exactly as described in the charger user guide.
All chargers can charge only Motorola Solutions authorized batteries. Other batteries may not charge. Motorola Solutions recommends that your radio remains powered off while charging.
• Charge your IMPRES™ battery with an IMPRES charger for optimized battery life and valuable battery data. IMPRES batteries charged exclusively with IMPRES chargers receive a 6-month capacity warranty extension over the standard Motorola Solutions Premium battery warranty duration.
• Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use for best performance.
What happens if I attach the wrong battery to the radio?
This battery mismatch alert feature is only applicable for IMPRES battery and Non-IMPRES battery with kit number programmed in Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM).
When the radio is attached with the wrong battery, a low pitched warning tone sounds, the LED blinks in red, display shows Wrong Battery and the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech sounds Wrong Battery if the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech is loaded by using CPS.
The certification of the radio is voided if you attach a UL battery to an FM approved radio or vice versa. Your radio can be preprogrammed in CPS to alert you if this battery mismatch occurs. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
How do I attach the battery to the radio?
Follow the procedure to attach the battery to your radio:
1. Align the battery with the rails on the back of the radio.
2. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards until the latch snaps into place.
3. Slide battery latch into lock position.
How do I remove the battery from the radio?
To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the battery latch marked A into unlock position and hold, and slide the battery down and off the rails.
How do I attach the antenna to my radio?
Follow the procedure to attach the antenna to your radio. Ensure that the radio is turned off.
Set the antenna in the receptacle and turn clockwise until snug to provide best protection against water and dust.
How do I remove the antenna from my radio?
To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise.
What type of antenna should be used if it needs replacement?
If the antenna must be replaced, ensure that only MOTOTRBO antennas are used. Neglecting this damages your radio.
How do I attach the carry holster to my radio?
Follow the procedure to attach the carry holster to your radio:
1. Align the rails on the carry holster with the grooves on the battery.
2. Press downwards until you hear a click.
How do I attach the Universal Connector Cover (Dust Cover)?
The universal connector is located on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect MOTOTRBO accessories to the radio. Follow the procedure to attach the dust cover to your radio. Replace the dust cover when the universal connector is not in use.
1. Insert the slanted end of the cover into the slots above the universal connector.
2. Press downwards on the cover to seat the dust cover properly on the universal connector.
3. Secure the connector cover to the radio by turning the thumbscrew clockwise.
How do I clean the Universal Connector (Dust Cover) if the radio is exposed to water or contaminants?
If the radio is exposed to water, dry the universal connector before attaching an accessory or replacing the dust cover. If the radio is exposed to salt water or contaminants, perform the following cleaning procedure:
1. Mix one tablespoon of mild dishwashing detergent with one gallon of water to produce a 0.5 percent solution.
2. Clean only the external surfaces of the radio with the solution. Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, nonmetallic, short-bristled brush.
3. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft and lint-free cloth. Ensure the contact surface of the universal connector is clean and dry.
4. Apply Deoxit Gold Cleaner or Lubricant Pen (Manufacturer CAIG Labs, Part number G100P) on the contact surface of the universal connector.
5. Attach an accessory to the universal connector to test the connectivity.
NOTICE: Do not submerge the radio in water. Ensure excess detergent does not get trapped in between the universal connector, controls, or crevices. Clean the radio once a month for maintenance. For a harsher environment such as in petrochemical plants or in a high salt density marine environment, clean the radio more often.
How do I remove the Universal Connector Cover (Dust Cover)?
Follow the procedure to remove the dust cover from your radio:
1. Push the latch downwards.
2. Lift the cover up and slide down the dust cover from the universal connector to remove it.
Replace the dust cover when the universal connector is not in use.
How do I power up the radio?
Follow the procedure to power up your radio:
Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise until a click sounds.
If successful:
• A tone sounds.
• The green LED lights up.
• The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a welcome message or image.
• The Home screen lights up.
What happens if the Tones/Alerts function is disabled when powering up?
If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is no tone upon powering up.
What happens during the initial power-up after a software version update to R02.07.00.0000 or later?
During the initial power-up after a software version update to R02.07.00.0000 or later, a GNSS firmware upgrade takes place for 20 seconds. After the upgrade, the radio resets and turns on. This firmware upgrade is only applicable for portable models with the latest software and hardware.
What should I do if my radio does not power up?
Check your battery if your radio does not power up. Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up.
How do I power off the radio?
Follow the procedure to power off your radio:
Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob counterclockwise until a click sounds.
The display shows Powering Down.
How do I adjust the volume on my radio?
Follow the procedure to change the volume level of your radio.
Do one of the following:
• Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise to increase the volume.
• Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
What if the volume level cannot be lowered past a certain point?
Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
How do I use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll through options or navigate vertically?
You can use the 4-way navigation button to scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and navigate vertically.
| Category | Direction (Up/Down) | Direction (Left/Right) |
|---|---|---|
| Menu | Vertical Navigation | – |
| Lists | Vertical Navigation | – |
| View Details | Vertical Navigation | Previous/Next Item |
How do I use the 4-Way Navigation Button as a number, alias, or free form text editor?
You can use the 4-way navigation button as a number, alias, or free form text editor.
| Editor Category | Direction (Up/Down) | Direction (Left/Right) |
|---|---|---|
| Number | – | Left: Delete last digit Right: – |
| Alias | – | – |
| Free Form Text | Move cursor up/down | Move cursor one character right/left |
| Numeric Values | Increase/Decrease | Move cursor one character right/left |
How do I use the keypad to enter characters for aliases, IDs, or text messages?
You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The following table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.
| Key | 1 Press | 2 Presses | 3 Presses | 4 Presses | 5 Presses | 6 Presses | 7 Presses | 8 Presses | 9 Presses | 10 Presses | 11 Presses | 12 Presses | 13 Presses |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 1 | . | , | ? | ! | @ | & | ‘ | % | — | : | * | # |
| 2 ABC | A | B | C | 2 | |||||||||
| 3 DEF | D | E | F | 3 | |||||||||
| 4 GHI | G | H | I | 4 | |||||||||
| 5 JKL | J | K | L | 5 | |||||||||
| 6 MNO | M | N | O | 6 | |||||||||
| 7 PQRS | P | Q | R | S | 7 | ||||||||
| 8 TUV | T | U | V | 8 | |||||||||
| 9 WXYZ | W | X | Y | Z | 9 | ||||||||
| 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||
| * | * or del | ||||||||||||
| # | # or space |
How do I activate or turn off CAPS lock using the keypad?
Press the 0 key to enter “0”. Long press the 0 key to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press turns off the CAPS lock.
How do I delete a character or enter an asterisk (*) using the keypad?
Press the * key during text entry to delete the character. Press the * key during numeric entry to enter an asterisk “*”.
How do I insert a space, enter a hash (#), or change text entry method using the keypad?
Press the # key during text entry to insert a space. Press the # key during numeric entry to enter a hash “#”. Long press the # key to change the text entry method.
What are the WAVE display icons and what do they mean?
The following icons appear momentarily on the display when WAVE is enabled (applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only):
| Icon (Description) | Meaning |
|---|---|
| WAVE Connected (Stylized Wi-Fi signal) | WAVE is connected. |
| WAVE Disconnected (Stylized Wi-Fi signal with a red X) | WAVE is disconnected. |
How do I set an active WAVE channel?
WAVE channels are configured through CPS. This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Follow the procedure to select the required WAVE channel:
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to WAVE Channels. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required WAVE channel. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Set As Active. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected channel.
How do I view WAVE channel information?
Follow the procedure to view WAVE channel information:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed WAVE Channel List button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. If accessed via menu: Press Up or Down Navigation button to WAVE Channels. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required WAVE channel. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View Details. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows the WAVE channel details.
How do I view WAVE Endpoints information?
Follow the procedure to view WAVE Endpoints information:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Contact button. Skip to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. If accessed via menu: Press Up or Down Navigation button to Endpoints. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required WAVE Endpoint. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Menu/OK to select View Details.
The display shows the WAVE Endpoint details.
How do I change the WAVE server IP address, user ID, and password (WAVE Configuration)?
Follow the procedure to set the WAVE server IP address, user ID, and password:
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to WAVE. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Menu/OK to select Server Address. Press Menu/OK to change the server address. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Down Navigation button to User ID. Press Menu/OK to change the user ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
7. Press Down Navigation button to Password. Press Menu/OK to view or change the WAVE password. Press Menu/OK to select.
8. Press Down Navigation button to Apply. Press Menu/OK to apply all the changes made.
The display shows the positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Radio Settings screen.
How do I make group calls on a WAVE Channel?
Follow the procedure to make group calls on a WAVE Channel:
1. Select the WAVE channel with the required group alias or ID.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line displays the Group Call icon and alias. The second text line displays the WAVE group alias.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID.
What happens if the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled during a WAVE group call?
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
When does a WAVE group call end?
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
How does the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button work in Capacity Max operations?
The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call.
Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen.
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking.
What are short press and long press for programmable buttons?
Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions.
Short press: Pressing and releasing rapidly.
Long press: Pressing and holding for the programmed duration.
See Emergency Operation for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button.
What is the Audio Profiles assignable radio function?
Audio Profiles: Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile.
What is the Audio Routing assignable radio function?
Audio Routing: Toggles audio routing between internal and external speakers.
What are the common assignable radio functions for programmable buttons in Capacity Max?
The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons by your dealer or system administrator:
• Audio Toggle: Toggles audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory.
• Bluetooth® Audio Switch: Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
• Bluetooth Connect: Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation.
• Bluetooth Disconnect: Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices.
• Bluetooth Discoverable: Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.
• Contacts: Provides direct access to the Contacts list.
• Call Alert: Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent.
• Call Log: Selects the call log list.
• Emergency: Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency.
• Indoor Location: Toggles Indoor Location on or off.
• Intelligent Audio: Toggles intelligent audio on or off.
• Manual Dial: Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID.
• Manual Site Roam: Starts the manual site search.
• Mic AGC: Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control (AGC) on or off.
• Notifications: Provides direct access to the Notifications list.
• One Touch Access: Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message.
• Option Board Feature: Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels.
What are further common assignable radio functions for programmable buttons in Capacity Max?
• Phone: Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list.
• Privacy: Toggles privacy on or off.
• Radio Alias and ID: Provides radio alias and ID.
• Remote Monitor: Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators.
• Reset Home Channel: Sets a new home channel.
• Silence Home Channel Reminder: Mutes the Home Channel Reminder.
• Site Info: Displays the current Capacity Max site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled.
• Site Lock: When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site.
• Status: Selects the status list menu.
• Telemetry Control: Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio.
• Text Message: Selects the text message menu.
• Toggle Call Priority Level: Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/Normal.
• Trill Enhancement: Toggles trill enhancement on or off.
• Voice Announcement On/Off: Toggles voice announcement on or off.
• Wi-Fi: Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
• Zone Selection: Allows selection from a list of zones.
What is the Tones/Alerts assignable setting/utility function?
Tones/Alerts: Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
What are common assignable settings or utility functions related to display and power?
• Backlight: Toggles display backlight on or off.
• Backlight Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level.
• Display Mode: Toggles the day/night display mode on or off.
• Keypad Lock: Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked.
• Power Level: Toggles transmit power level between high and low.
How do I access programmed functions on my radio?
Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the menu function, and press Menu/OK to select a function or enter a sub-menu.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press Back/Home button to return to the previous screen.
• Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen.
Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen.
What do the display icons on the status bar mean?
The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Battery | Battery outline with 0-4 bars | The number of bars (0–4) shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. The icon blinks when the battery is low. |
| Bluetooth Connected | Stylized B with radiating lines, lit | The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. |
| Bluetooth Not Connected | Stylized B, not lit | The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. |
| Emergency | Orange triangle with exclamation mark | Radio is in Emergency mode. |
| GNSS Available | Satellite dish icon, lit | GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is available. |
| GNSS Not Available | Satellite dish icon with a cross, not lit | GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. |
| High Volume Data | Stylized ‘H’ with arrows | Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. |
| Indoor Location Available | Location pin icon | Indoor location status is on and available. (Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware) |
| Indoor Location Unavailable | Location pin icon with exclamation mark | Indoor location status is on but unavailable due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Bluetooth. (Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware) |
| Mute Mode | Speaker with a cross | Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. |
| Notification | Orange star | Notification List has one or more missed events. |
| Option Board | Green circuit board icon | The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) |
| Option Board Non-Function | Circuit board icon with a red cross | The Option Board is disabled. |
| Over-the-Air Programming Delay Timer | Clock icon with ‘o5’ | Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. |
| Power Level | ‘L’ or ‘H’ | Radio is set at Low power (L) or Radio is set at High power (H). |
| Priority 1 | ‘1’ on a pedestal | Indicates Priority Talkgroup 1. |
| Priority 2 | ‘2’ on a pedestal | Indicates Priority Talkgroup 2. |
| Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) | Signal bars (up to 4) | The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. |
| Ring Only | Bell icon | Ringing mode is enabled. |
| Shared Frequency | Stylized S with signal waves | Indicates radio is locking to shared control channel. |
| Secure | Key icon | The Privacy feature is enabled. |
| Silent Ring | Bell icon with a cross | Silent ring mode is enabled. |
| Site Roaming | Antenna tower icon | The site roaming feature is enabled. |
What do these Wi-Fi related display icons on the status bar mean?
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Status | Envelope icon | Indicates a new status message. |
| Tones Disable | Bell icon with a red X | Tones are turned off. |
| Unsecure | Open padlock icon | The Privacy feature is disabled. |
| Vibrate | Wavy lines icon | Vibrate mode is enabled. |
| Vibrate and Ring | Wavy lines and bell icon | Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. |
| Wi-Fi Excellent | Wi-Fi symbol with 4 full bars | Wi-Fi signal is excellent. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Good | Wi-Fi symbol with 3 full bars | Wi-Fi signal is good. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Average | Wi-Fi symbol with 2 full bars | Wi-Fi signal is average. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Poor | Wi-Fi symbol with 1 full bar | Wi-Fi signal is poor. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Unavailable | Wi-Fi symbol with no bars (outline) | Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
What do the advance menu icons (Checkbox Checked, Checkbox Empty, Solid Black Box) indicate?
The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Checkbox (Checked) | Square box with a checkmark | Indicates that the option is selected. |
| Checkbox (Empty) | Empty square box | Indicates that the option is not selected. |
| Solid Black Box | Solid black square box | Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. |
What do the Bluetooth device icons indicate?
The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Bluetooth Audio Device | Headset icon | Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. |
| Bluetooth Data Device | Mobile device/scanner icon | Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. |
| Bluetooth PTT Device | Grid/button icon | Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). |
What do these call icons mean?
The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Bluetooth PC Call | Monitor with Bluetooth symbol | Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Call Priority High | Up arrow on a pedestal | Indicating Call Priority Level High is enabled. |
| Dispatch Call | Headset with monitor | The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. |
| Group Call/All Call | Three figures icon | Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Non-IP Peripheral Individual call | Single figure with antenna | Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral individual call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Non-IP Peripheral Group call | Multiple figures with antenna | Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral group call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Option Board Individual Call | Single figure with chip | Indicates an Option Board individual call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Option Board Group Call | Multiple figures with chip | Indicates an Option Board group call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Phone Call as Group/All Call | Telephone handset with three figures | Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Phone Call as Private Call | Telephone handset with single figure | Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Private Call | Single figure icon | Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias (name) or ID (number). |
What do the Job Tickets icons mean?
The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| All Jobs | Checklist icon | Indicates all jobs listed. |
| New Jobs | Checklist with a starburst | Indicates new jobs. |
| In Progress | Checklist with an arrow | Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Successfully. |
| Send Failed | Checklist with a red X | Jobs cannot be sent. |
| Sent Successfully | Checklist with a green checkmark | Jobs have been successfully sent. |
| Priority 1 | Red triangle with ‘1’ | Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. |
| Priority 2 | Orange triangle with ‘2’ | Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. |
| Priority 3 | Yellow triangle with ‘3’ | Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. |
What do the Mini Notice icons mean?
The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken.
| Icon Name | Icon Description | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Failed Transmission (Negative) | Red exclamation mark | Failed action taken. |
| Successful Transmission (Positive) | Green checkmark | Successful action taken. |
What does the Transmission in Progress (Transitional) icon mean?
The icon (a grid with an arrow) indicates that data is transmitting. This is seen before indication for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission.
What do the Sent Items icons (In Progress, Individual or Group Message Read) mean?
The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder.
| Icon Name | Icon Description (combination) | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| In Progress | Envelope with three dots (sending) OR Envelope with an arrow (pending) | The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. |
| Individual or Group Message Read | Open envelope icon OR Open envelope with multiple figures | The text message has been read. |
What do the Sent Items icons (Individual or Group Message Unread, Send Failed, Sent Successfully) mean?
| Icon Name | Icon Description (combination) | Indication |
|---|---|---|
| Individual or Group Message Unread | Closed envelope icon OR Closed envelope with multiple figures | The text message has not been read. |
| Send Failed | Envelope with a red X OR Envelope with multiple figures and red X | The text message cannot be sent. |
| Sent Successfully | Envelope with a green checkmark OR Envelope with multiple figures and green checkmark | The text message has been successfully sent. |
What does the LED indicator show?
The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio.
Blinking Red:
• Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up.
• Radio is receiving an emergency transmission.
• Radio is transmitting in low battery state.
• Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured.
• Mute Mode is enabled.
Solid Green:
• Radio is powering up.
• Radio is transmitting.
• Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission.
Blinking Green:
• Radio is receiving a call or data.
• Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions over the air.
• Radio is detecting activity over the air. (This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol.)
Double Blinking Green:
• Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data.
Solid Yellow:
• Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.
What does the LED indicator show (continued)?
Blinking Yellow:
• Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert.
Double Blinking Yellow:
• Radio has Auto Roaming enabled.
• Radio is actively searching for a new site.
• Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert.
• Radio is locked.
What types of tones can the radio produce?
The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker.
• High Pitched Tone (represented by an upward pointing block arrow)
• Low Pitched Tone (represented by a downward pointing block arrow)
• Continuous Tone: A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination.
• Periodic Tone: Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself.
• Repetitive Tone: A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user.
• Momentary Tone: Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio.
What are audio tones?
Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio.
What are indicator tones?
Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken.
• Positive Indicator Tone (represented by a solid block)
• Negative Indicator Tone (represented by a block with a diagonal line)
What does ‘Registering’ mean on my radio display?
Typically, registration is sent to the system during power-up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list.
The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully but is waiting for a response to the registration messages from the radio.
When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search.
If the indications persist, the user should change locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site.
What does ‘Out of Range’ mean on my radio display and what should I do?
A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is unable to detect a signal from the system or from the current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF) coverage range.
When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still receives out of range indications while being in an area with good RF coverage.
What does ‘Talkgroup Affiliation Failed’ mean?
A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during registration.
A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to affiliate to.
When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP Alias is displayed in the home screen with a highlighted background.
What does ‘Register Denied’ mean on my radio display?
Registration denied indicators are received when the registration with the system is not accepted.
The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration is denied when the system operator has disabled the access of the radio to the system.
When a radio is denied registration, Register Denied is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives affiliation failure indications.
How do I select a zone on my radio?
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Zone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the current zone.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required zone. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen.
How do I select a zone by using the alias search?
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Zone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the current zone.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
5. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen.
How do I select a call type?
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.
What happens if I select an unprogrammed channel?
Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel. Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead.
How does the radio select a site in a multi-site network?
A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites.
What is a Roam Request and how do I initiate it?
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable.
If there are no sites available:
• The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites.
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available.
This is programmed by your dealer.
Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button.
You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>.
How do I use the Site Lock On/Off feature?
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site.
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site.
• The display shows Site Locked.
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked.
• The display shows Site Unlocked.
What is Site Restriction in Capacity Max?
In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches for a different network site.
When experiencing site restrictions, your radio displays Register Denied and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search.
What is Site Trunking and what are its limitations?
A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller to be considered as System Trunking.
If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and visual indication to the user to inform the user of their limited functionality.
When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays Site Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds.
The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and individual voice calls as well as send text messages to other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate to the radios at the site.
Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites would be lost. If there are multiple sites that cover the current location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within coverage.
What methods can I use to select a subscriber or group alias/ID for making calls?
You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:
• Alias Search: This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone.
• Contacts List: This method provides direct access to the Contacts list.
• Manual Dial (by using Contacts): This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone.
How do Programmed Number Keys work for calls?
This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys for more information.
How does the Programmed One Touch Access Button work for calls?
This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed.
A programmable button can also be used for Phone Calls only.
How do I make a Group Call?
Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the Group Call icon and alias.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID.
5. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end a Group Call.
How do I make Group Calls by using the Contacts List?
Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon.
5. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
6. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID.
7. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Group Call. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I make Group Calls by using the Programmable Number Key?
Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key.
1. Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the call status for Group Call.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias.
5. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Group Call.
How do I make Group Calls by using the Alias Search?
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see Party Not Available on the display; the radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the alias search.
NOTICE: Press Menu/OK button or Back/Home button to exit alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
5. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Call icon.
6. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds.
8. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Group Call.
How do I respond to Group Calls?
Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio.
When you receive a Group Call:
• The green LED blinks.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
• The second text line displays the group call alias.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
1. Do one of the following:
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond.
The green LED lights up.
2. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
3. Release the PTT button to listen.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period.
What is a Broadcast Call?
A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup.
The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond.
The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of users, the radio must be configured as part of a group.
How do I make Broadcast Calls?
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and alias.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Broadcast Call.
How do I make Broadcast Calls using the Contact List?
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED blinks. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon.
5. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Broadcast Call.
How do I make Broadcast Calls using the Programmable Number Key?
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the programmable number key.
1. Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the Broadcast Call.
How do I receive Broadcast Calls?
Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your radio.
When you receive a Broadcast Call:
• The green LED blinks.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
• The second text line displays the group call alias.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
NOTICE: Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Tone will sound momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call.
What are the two types of Private Call setup (OACSU and FOACSU)?
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call:
• Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU): OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio presence check and completes the call automatically.
• Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU): FOACSU also sets up the call after performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call.
The type of call is configured by the system administrator.
What happens if the target radio is not available when trying to set up a Private Call?
If the target radio is not available prior to setting up the Private Call, the following occur:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check.
How can an ongoing Private Call be terminated?
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I make Private Calls?
Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative indicator tone when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. If the target radio is not available, a short tone sounds and the display show Party Not Available.
1. Do one of the following:
• Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status.
3. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds.
5. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I make Private Calls by using the Programmable Number Key?
Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key.
1. Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias.
5. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I make Private Calls by using the Alias Search?
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the alias search.
NOTICE: Press Menu/OK button or Back/Home button to exit alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
5. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Private Call icon.
6. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds.
8. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I make a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button?
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
3. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends.
How do I make Private Calls by using the Manual Dial?
Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Enter the subscriber ID, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
• Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
6. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias.
7. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
8. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID.
9. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU)?
When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU):
• The green LED blinks.
• The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
Depending on how your radio is configured, either OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to Private Calls may or may not require user acknowledgment. For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes and the call connects automatically.
How do I accept Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU)?
When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
• The green LED blinks.
• The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
1. To accept a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Accept and press Menu/OK to answer a Private Call.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
The green LED lights up.
2. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
3. Release the PTT button to listen.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the Back/Home button.
How do I decline Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU)?
When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
• The green LED blinks.
• The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
To decline a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Reject and press Menu/OK to decline a Private Call.
• Press Back/Home button to decline a Private Call.
What is an All Call?
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on system configuration.
An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the system cannot respond to an All Call.
Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. The system administrator may configure one or both of these in your radio.
NOTICE: Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support System-Wide All Calls.
How do I make All Calls?
Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio.
1. Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the All Call.
How do I make All Calls by using the Programmable Number Key?
Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key.
1. Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the All Call.
How do I make All Calls by using the Alias Search?
You can use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the alias search.
NOTICE: Press Menu/OK button or Back/Home button to exit alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
5. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Group Call icon.
6. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The call initiator can press the Back/Home button to end the All Call.
How do I receive All Calls?
When you receive an All Call, the following occur:
• A tone sounds.
• The green LED blinks.
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias ID.
• The second text line displays either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call.
NOTICE: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the call ends during an All Call.
What are Phone Calls and what features might be available?
A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a group of radios and a telephone.
Depending on how the radio is configured, the following features may or may not be made available:
• Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone
• De-access code
• Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call
• Ability to reject or accept a phone call
The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
How do I make Phone Calls?
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Proceed to step 2.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured.
3. Enter the access code (cannot be more than 10 characters), and press Menu/OK to proceed.
4. Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status.
If the call is successful:
• The DTMF Tone sounds.
• You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user.
• The display shows the subscriber alias and the Phone Call icon.
If the call is unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:.
• If the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call.
5. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
6. Release the PTT button to listen.
7. Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press Menu/OK to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen.
8. Press Back/Home button to end the call.
9. Do one of the following to handle deaccess code:
• If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press Menu/OK to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call.
If the call ends successfully: A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
How do I make Phone Calls with the Programmable Button?
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the programmable button.
1. Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press the Menu/OK button to proceed.
The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status.
If the call-setup is successful: The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status.
If call-setup is unsuccessful: A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
3. Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen.
4. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call. Do one of the following:
• Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits: and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the Menu/OK button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen.
• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
5. Press Back/Home button to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the Menu/OK button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 and step 5 or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
NOTICE: During channel access, press Back/Home button to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call.
How do I make Phone Calls by using the Contacts List?
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Call.
If the selected entry is empty: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Phone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured.
5. Enter the access code (cannot be more than 10 characters), and press Menu/OK to proceed.
The display shows Calling, subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.
If the call is successful: The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the Phone Call icon, and Phone Call.
If the call is unsuccessful: A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
6. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears.
7. Release the PTT button to listen.
8. Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press Menu/OK to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen.
9. Press Back/Home button to end the call.
10. If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press Menu/OK to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully: A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
How do I make Phone Calls by using the Alias Search?
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the alias search.
NOTICE: Press Menu/OK button or Back/Home button to exit alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
5. To make a call to the required alias, press Menu/OK.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Phone. Press Menu/OK to select. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Phone Call icon.
7. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
8. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds.
9. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I make Phone Calls by using the Manual Dial?
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Phone Number. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor.
5. Enter the telephone number, and press Menu/OK to proceed. The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured.
6. Enter the access code (cannot be more than 10 characters), and press Menu/OK to proceed.
The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status.
If the call is successful: The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows subscriber alias and the Phone Call icon.
If the call is unsuccessful: A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
7. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
8. Release the PTT button to listen.
9. Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press Menu/OK to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen.
10. Press Back/Home button to end the call.
11. Do one of the following:
• If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press Menu/OK to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call.
If the call ends successfully: A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
What is Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)?
The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.
How do I initiate DTMF calls?
Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio.
1. Press and hold the PTT button.
2. Do one of the following:
• Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call.
• Press * (asterisk key) to initiate a DTMF call.
• Press # (hash key) to initiate a DTMF call.
How do I respond to Phone Calls received as All Calls?
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call.
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner.
• The display shows either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration and Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
How do I respond to Phone Calls received as Group Calls?
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
1. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
2. Release the PTT button to listen.
3. Press Back/Home button to end the call.
NOTICE: Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call.
The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully: A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
How do I respond to Phone Calls received as Private Calls?
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker.
1. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
2. Release the PTT button to listen.
3. Press Back/Home button to end the call.
NOTICE: Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call (this likely means private call context here). The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call.
The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully: A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
What is Call Preemption?
Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission.
With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked channels are unavailable.
Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well.
What is Voice Interrupt?
Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress voice transmission.
This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in-progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice transmission to the participant in the stopped call.
The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to the intended parties when a call is in progress.
Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
How do I enable or use Voice Interrupt?
Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
1. To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call, press the PTT button. On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
What is Call Queue and how does it work?
When there are no resources available to process a call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the system queue for the next available resources.
You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard.
If the call setup is successful, the following occur:
• The green LED blinks.
• If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds.
• The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias.
• The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT button to begin voice transmission.
If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:
• If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds.
• The display shows the failure notice screen momentarily.
• The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup.
What is Priority Call and how does it work? (High Priority, Normal Priority)
Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high priority call when all channels are busy.
With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the system does not preempt any calls, and places the requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call queue, it declares failure.
The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured. Press the programmable button to toggle between normal and high priority level. When you use the following features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the preconfigured setting:
• All voice calls
• DMR III Text Message/Text Message
• Job Ticket
• Remote monitor
The following are the types of Priority Call:
High Priority
• The radio displays Next Call: High Priority.
• Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio display.
• Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority.
Normal Priority
• The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority.
• Call Priority High icon disappears.
• Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority.
Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
What is Talkgroup Scan?
This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined by a Receive Group List.
When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow. Your radio unmutes to any member in its Receive Group List.
When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive transmission from any members of the Receive Group List, except for All Call and the selected Talkgroup.
Talkgroup Scan can be configured by using CPS. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
How do I turn Talkgroup Scan On or Off?
Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Scan. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Turn On. Press Menu/OK to select.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Turn Off. Press Menu/OK to select.
If scan is enabled:
• The display shows Scan On and Scan icon.
• The yellow LED blinks.
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
If scan is disabled:
• The display shows Scan Off.
• The Scan icon disappears.
• The LED turns off.
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
What is a Receive Group List for Talkgroup Scan?
Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the talkgroup scan list.
This list is created when your radio is programmed and it determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in this list.
What can I do if my radio is programmed to edit the scan list?
If your radio has been programmed to edit the scan list, you can:
• Add/remove talkgroups.
• Add, remove, and/or edit priority for talkgroups. Refer to Editing Priority for a Talkgroup.
• Add, remove, and/or edit affiliation talkgroups. Refer to Adding Talkgroup Affiliation and Removing Talkgroup Affiliation.
• Replace the existing scan list with a new scan list.
IMPORTANT: To add member into the list, the talkgroup must first be configured in the radio.
NOTICE: Receive Group List is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
What is Priority Monitor and how does it work with Talkgroup Scan?
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority talkgroup call.
NOTICE: This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup Scan feature is enabled.
Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups: Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives transmission according to the priority order below:
1. Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup
2. Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup
3. Emergency Call for non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List
4. All Call
5. P1 Talkgroup Call
6. P2 Talkgroup Call
7. Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List
See Editing Priority for a Talkgroup for more information on how to add, remove, and/or edit the priority of the talkgroups in the scan list.
How do I edit the priority for a talkgroup in the Talkgroup Scan Menu?
NOTICE: This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
In the Talkgroup Scan Menu, you can view or edit the priority of a talkgroup.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Scan. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required talkgroup. Press Menu/OK to select. The current priority is indicated by a Priority 1 or Priority 2 icon beside the talkgroup.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Edit Priority. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required priority level. Press Menu/OK to select.
If another talkgroup has been assigned to Priority 1 or Priority 2, you can choose to overwrite the current priority. When the display shows Overwrite Existing?, press Up or Down Navigation button to the following options:
• No to return to the previous step.
• Yes to overwrite.
The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears beside the talkgroup.
What is Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation?
In a Capacity Max system, your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at a site.
Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are automatically affiliated.
NOTICE: This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
How do I add a talkgroup affiliation?
Follow the procedure to add a talkgroup affiliation.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Scan. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press Menu/OK to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows a solid black box beside the selected talkgroup ID or alias if affiliated.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Edit Affiliation. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to On. Press Menu/OK to select.
When On is selected, a solid black box appears beside the talkgroup ID or alias.
If affiliation is successful, the display shows a checkmark beside the selected talkgroup ID or alias.
If affiliation is unsuccessful, a solid black box remains beside the talkgroup ID or alias.
NOTICE: The radio displays List Full when a maximum of seven talkgroups are selected for affiliation in the scan list. To select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. See Removing Talkgroup Affiliation.
How do I remove a talkgroup affiliation?
When the affiliation list is full and you want to select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. Follow the procedure to remove a talkgroup affiliation.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Scan. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press Menu/OK to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows a solid black box beside the selected talkgroup ID or alias.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Edit Affiliation. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Off. Press Menu/OK to select. When Off is selected, the solid black box disappears from beside the talkgroup ID or alias.
What is the Talkback feature and how does it work when enabled or disabled during scanning?
The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a transmission while scanning.
If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
Talkback Disabled: The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires.
Talkback Enabled: If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group.
NOTICE: If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group.
How does Bluetooth work with the radio?
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range.
Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported.
Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
Your radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one which it has connected to before in a prior session. Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press the home back button during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation.
How do I turn Bluetooth On or Off?
Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to My Status. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a checkmark.
4. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to On. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark beside On.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Off. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Off.
How do I connect to Bluetooth devices?
Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Devices. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Connect. Press Menu/OK to select.
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
The display shows Connecting to <Device>.
Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon.
• The display shows a checkmark beside the connected device.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Connecting Failed.
How do I connect to Bluetooth devices in Discoverable Mode?
Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Find Me. Press Menu/OK to select. The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode.
Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon.
• The display shows a checkmark beside the connected device.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Connecting Failed.
How do I disconnect from Bluetooth devices?
Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Devices. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Disconnect. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.
Wait for acknowledgment.
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears.
• The checkmark disappears beside the connected device.
How do I switch the audio route between the internal radio speaker and a Bluetooth device?
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button.
The display shows one of the following results:
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio.
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth.
How do I view Bluetooth device details?
Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Devices. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View Details. Press Menu/OK to select.
How do I edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices?
Follow the procedure to edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Devices. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Edit Name. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Enter a new device name. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Device Name Saved.
How do I delete a Bluetooth device name?
You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Devices. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required device. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Delete. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Device Deleted.
How do I adjust Bluetooth Mic Gain values?
This allows control of microphone gain value in connected Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to BT Mic Gain. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. To edit values, press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to increase or to decrease values. Press Menu/OK to select.
What is Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode?
The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode must be enabled by the dealer or system administrator.
NOTICE: If enabled, Bluetooth is not displayed in the Menu and you cannot use any Bluetooth programmable button features.
Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode enables dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based location.
What is Indoor Location and how is it used?
NOTICE: Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
Indoor Location is used to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position.
How do I turn Indoor Location On or Off?
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions.
• Access this feature through the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth and press Menu/OK to select.
c. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Indoor Location and press Menu/OK to select.
d. Press Menu/OK to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone.
e. Press Menu/OK to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone.
• Access this feature by using the programmed button.
a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone.
b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone.
How do I access Indoor Location Beacons information?
Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Bluetooth and press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Indoor Location and press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Beacons and press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows the beacons information.
What are Job Tickets and how are they organized (My Tasks folder, Shared Tasks folder)?
This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform.
NOTICE: This feature can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:
• My Tasks folder: Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID.
• Shared Tasks folder: Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals.
You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed.
NOTICE: Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is powered down and powered up again.
How are Job Tickets organized and prioritized in the All folder?
All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID.
Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority.
How can I update Job Tickets?
Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:
• Modify content of Job Tickets.
• Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets.
• Move Job Tickets from folder to folder.
• Canceling of Job Tickets.
How do I access the Job Ticket folder?
Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required Job Ticket. Press Menu/OK to select.
How do I log in or out of the remote server for Job Tickets?
This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Log In. Press Menu/OK to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I create Job Tickets?
Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Create Ticket. Press Menu/OK to select.
How do I send Job Tickets using one Job Ticket template?
If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket.
1. Use the keypad to type the required room number. Press Menu/OK to select.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Room Status. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required option. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Send. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I send Job Tickets using more than one Job Ticket template?
If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets.
1. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required option. Press Menu/OK to select.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Send. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I respond to Job Tickets?
Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required job ticket. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Menu/OK once more to access the sub-menu. You can also press the corresponding number key (1–9) to Quick Reply.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required job ticket option (e.g., Accept, Reject, Start, Complete). Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
7. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I delete Job Tickets?
Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to All folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required Job Ticket. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Menu/OK again while viewing the Job Ticket.
7. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Delete. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I delete all Job Tickets?
Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to All folder. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Delete All. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Yes. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to No. Press Menu/OK to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I start a manual site search?
These features are applicable when your current radio channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. Follow the procedure to start manual site search when the received signal strength is poor in order to attempt to find a site with better signal.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Site Roaming. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Active Search. Press Menu/OK to select.
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Finding Site.
If the radio finds a new site:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Site <Alias> Found.
If the radio fails to find a new site:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Out of Range.
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Channel Busy.
How do I use Site Lock On/Off?
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site.
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site.
• The display shows Site Locked.
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked.
• The display shows Site Unlocked.
How do I access the Neighbor Sites List?
This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Neighbor Sites. Press Menu/OK to select.
What is the Home Channel Reminder?
This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time.
If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:
• The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound.
• The first line of the display shows Non.
• The second line shows Home Channel.
How do I mute the Home Channel Reminder?
When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder.
Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder programmable button.
The first line of the display shows HCR and the second line shows Silenced.
How do I set a new Home Channel when the Home Channel Reminder occurs?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Home Channel. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the desired new home channel alias. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark beside the selected home channel alias.
What is Remote Monitor?
This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio.
Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target radio. This feature automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor using the programmed button?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor by using the Contacts list?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Remote Mon.. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I initiate Remote Monitors by using the Manual Dial?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
• Edit the previously dialed ID, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Remote Mon.. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
7. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful: A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
What information is displayed for each entry in Contacts?
Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, Broadcast Call, Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call.
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details.
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry.
NOTICE: You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry.
Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
• Call Type
• Call Alias
• Call ID
NOTICE: If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the transmission.
How do I assign entries to Programmable Number Keys?
Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Program Key. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press Up or Down Navigation button to the desired number key. Press Menu/OK to select.
• If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Press Up or Down Navigation button to Yes. Press Menu/OK to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice.
Press Up or Down Navigation button to No to return to the previous step.
How do I remove associations between entries and Programmable Number Keys?
Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4.
• Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Program Key. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Empty. Press Menu/OK to select. The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Yes. Press Menu/OK to select.
NOTICE: When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
How do I add new contacts?
Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to New Contact. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
6. Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press Menu/OK to proceed.
7. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required ringer type. Press Menu/OK to select.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls?
This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Private Call. Press Menu/OK to select.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required tone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Off. Press Menu/OK to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Text Messages?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Text Message. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the current tone.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required tone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Off. Press Menu/OK to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Alert. Press Menu/OK to select.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required tone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Off. Press Menu/OK to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Telemetry Status with Text?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Telemetry. Press Menu/OK to select. The current tone is indicated by a checkmark.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to the preferred tone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Tone <Number> Selected and a checkmark appears left of the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to Turn Off. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and a checkmark appears left of Turn Off.
How do I assign ring styles to contacts for Private Calls, Call Alerts, or Text Messages?
The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring styles on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View/Edit. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Menu/OK until display shows Ringer menu. A checkmark indicates the current selected tone.
6. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required tone. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I select a Ring Alert Type (Silent, Ring, Vibrate, Ring and Vibrate)?
NOTICE: The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed.
The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator tone or missed call.
For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.
For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.
You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to access the Ring Alert Type menu.
a. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press Menu/OK to select.
• Access this feature through the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities and press Menu/OK to select.
c. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings and press Menu/OK to select.
d. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alerts and press Menu/OK to select.
e. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Ring Alert Type and press Menu/OK to select.
f. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press Menu/OK to select.
How do I configure the Vibrate Style (Short, Medium, Long)?
NOTICE: The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature.
You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to access the Vibrate Style menu.
a. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Short, Medium, or Long and press Menu/OK to select.
• Access this feature via the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities and press Menu/OK to select.
c. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings and press Menu/OK to select.
d. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alerts and press Menu/OK to select.
e. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Vibrate Style and press Menu/OK to select.
f. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Short, Medium, or Long and press Menu/OK to select.
How do I enable or disable Escalating Alarm Tone Volume (Escalert)?
The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to escalate alarm tone volume on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Escalert.
6. Press Menu/OK to enable OR disable Escalert. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled. If disabled, a checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
What tasks can I perform with call logs (Store Alias/ID, Delete Call, View Details)?
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls.
Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
• Store Alias or ID to Contacts
• Delete Call
• View Details
How do I view recent calls (Missed, Answered, Outgoing)?
Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Log. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the preferred list. The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. Press Menu/OK to select.
The display shows the most recent entry.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to view the list.
You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button.
How do I store aliases or IDs from the Call List?
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Log. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required list. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Store. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows a blinking cursor.
6. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press Menu/OK to select.
You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I delete calls from the Call List?
Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the Call list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Log. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required list. Press Menu/OK to select.
If the list is empty: A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Delete Entry?. Press Menu/OK to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted.
• Press Up or Down Navigation button to No. Press Menu/OK to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I view details from the Call List?
Follow the procedure to view details on your radio from the Call list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Log. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required list. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to View Details. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows the details.
What is Call Alert operation?
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so.
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button.
In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio user when available. Voice communication is not involved in this feature.
The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or the system administrator in two ways:
• The radio is configured to allow the user to press the PTT button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a Private Call.
• The radio is configured to allow the user to press the PTT button and continue with other Talkgroup communication. Pressing the PTT button on the call alert entry will not allow the user to respond to the call initiator. The user must navigate to the Missed Call Log option at the Call Log menu and respond to the Call Alert from there.
An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended being used for the call alert feature. See Private Call.
How do I make Call Alerts using the One Touch Access button?
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
2. Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I make Call Alerts by using the Contacts List?
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Contacts. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select the subscriber alias or ID directly: Press Up or Down Navigation button to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK to select.
• Use the Manual Dial menu: Press Up or Down Navigation button to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK to select. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Radio Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Call Alert. Press Menu/OK to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
• If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice.
• If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I respond to Call Alerts?
Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio.
When you receive a Call Alert:
• A repetitive tone sounds.
• The yellow LED blinks.
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
• Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller.
• Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log.
See Notification List and Call Log Features for more information.
What is Mute Mode?
Mute Mode provides an option to the user to silence all audio indicators of the radio.
Once Mute Mode feature is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as Emergency operations.
When Mute Mode is exited, the radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions.
NOTICE: This is a purchasable feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
How do I turn on Mute Mode?
Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
Do one of the following:
• Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-down position momentarily. (NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.)
Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature can be enabled either through the radio menu or by your system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
IMPORTANT: User can only enable either Man Down or Face Down at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together.
The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
• Positive Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode On.
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen.
• Radio is muted.
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured.
How do I set the Mute Mode Timer?
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires.
If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.
1. Press Menu/OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Utilities. Press Menu/OK to select.
3. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK to select.
4. Press Up or Down Navigation button to Mute Timer. Press Menu/OK to select.
5. Press Up or Down Navigation button to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press Menu/OK.
How do I exit Mute Mode?
This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires.
Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. (NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.)
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
• Negative Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode Off.
• The blinking red LED turns off.
• Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored.
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped.
NOTICE: Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
What is Emergency Operation and how is it initiated?
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel.
In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm.
When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice.
Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
• Short Press: Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds.
• Long Press: Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds.
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
NOTICE: If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms: Emergency Alarm, Emergency Alarm with Call, Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow.
How do I turn the Talk Permit Tone on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Tones/Alerts. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Talk Permit. Press the OK button to select.
6. Press the OK button to enable or disable the Talk Permit Tone.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn the Power Up Tone on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Tones/Alerts. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Power Up. Press the OK button to select.
6. Press the OK button to enable or disable the Power Up Tone.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set text message alert tones?
You can customize the text message alert tone for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Contacts. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required alias or ID. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Message Alert. Press the OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Momentary. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside Momentary.
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Repetitive. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside Repetitive.
How do I set power levels on my radio?
You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. High enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with radios in closer proximity. This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency.
Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip the steps below.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Power. Press the OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to High. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside High.
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Low. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside Low.
6. Long press the Back button to return to the Home screen.
How do I change display modes (Day/Night)?
You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Display. Press the OK button to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required setting. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside the selected setting.
How do I adjust display brightness?
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Brightness. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the progress bar.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to decrease or increase the display brightness. Press the OK button to select.
How do I set the display backlight timer?
You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled.
Follow the procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Display. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Backlight Timer. Press the OK button to select.
How do I turn Backlight Auto On or off?
You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Backlight Auto.
5. Press the OK button to enable or disable Backlight Auto.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn LED indicators on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to LED Indicator. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the OK button to enable or disable the LED indicator.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the language on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Languages. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required language. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside the selected language.
How do I turn the option board on or off?
Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio:
Press the programmed Option Board button.
How do I turn Voice Announcement on or off?
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements.
Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Voice Announcement. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the OK button to enable or disable Voice Announcement.
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off?
The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio.
Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Mic AGC-D. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the OK button to enable or disable Digital Microphone AGC.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I switch the audio route between the internal radio speaker and a wired accessory?
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and wired accessory. You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the condition that:
• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.
• The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth accessory.
Press the programmed Audio Toggle button.
A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.
How do I turn Intelligent Audio on or off?
Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session.
Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Intelligent Audio. Press the OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to On. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside On.
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Off. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside Off.
How do I turn Trill Enhancement on or off?
You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill (rolling “R”) pronunciations.
Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Trill Enhance. Press the OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to On. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside On.
• Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Off. Press the OK button to select. The display shows a check mark beside Off.
How do I turn the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control feature on or off?
This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Mic Distortion. Press the OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press the OK button to enable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If enabled, a check mark appears beside Enabled.
• Press the OK button to disable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If disabled, the check mark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the audio ambience?
Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Audio Ambience. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required setting. Press the OK button to select.
The settings are as follows:
• Choose Default for the default factory settings.
• Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings.
• Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other.
The display shows a check mark beside the selected setting.
How do I set audio profiles on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Settings. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Audio Profiles. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required setting. Press the OK button to select.
The settings are as follows:
• Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings.
• Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age.
• Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds.
The display shows a check mark beside the selected setting.
NOTICE: Press the Back button to return to the previous screen. Long press the Back button to return to the Home screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires.
What general information does my radio contain?
The general information of your radio is as follows:
• Battery information.
• Radio alias and ID.
• Firmware and Codeplug versions.
• Software update.
• GNSS information.
• Site information.
• Received Signal Strength Indicator.
How do I access battery information?
This displays information of your radio battery.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Battery Info. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the battery information.
NOTICE: For IMPRES batteries only: The display reads Recondition Battery when the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information.
How do I check the radio alias and ID?
Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen.
• Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. If you accessed the menu, press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to My ID. Press the OK button to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID.
How do I check firmware and codeplug versions?
Follow the procedure to check the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Versions. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions.
How do I check GNSS information?
This displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of: Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Direction, Velocity, Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP), Satellites, Version.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to GNSS Info. Press the OK button to select.
5. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required item. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information.
How do I check software update information?
This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session.
Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio:
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to SW Update. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update.
How do I display site information?
Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Radio Info. Press the OK button to select.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Site Info. Press the OK button to select. The display shows the current site name.
How do I view Enterprise Wi-Fi certificate details?
You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate.
1. Press the OK button to access the menu.
2. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Utilities. Press the OK button to select.
3. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to Certificate Menu. Press the OK button to select. A check mark appears beside ready certificates.
4. Press the Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll to the required certificate. Press the OK button to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate.
NOTICE: For unready certificates, the display shows only Status.
What are the basic functions of the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button in Connect Plus Mode?
The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call.
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking.
How do programmable buttons work?
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:
Short press: Pressing and releasing rapidly.
Long press: Pressing and holding for the programmed duration.
NOTICE: The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button.
What are the assignable radio functions in Connect Plus Mode?
Beacon On/Off: Toggles the Beacon feature on or off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature.
Beacon Reset: Resets (cancels) the Beacon tone, but it does not turn the Beacon feature off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature.
Bluetooth® Audio Switch: Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
Bluetooth Connect: Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation.
Bluetooth Disconnect: Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Bluetooth Discoverable: Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.
Busy Queue Cancellation: Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled.
Call Log: Selects the call log list.
Channel Announcement: Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel.
Contacts: Provides direct access to the Contacts list.
Emergency On/Off: Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency.
Indoor Location: Toggles Indoor Location on or off.
Intelligent Audio: Toggles intelligent audio on or off.
Man Down Alarms On/Off: Toggles all configured Man Down Alarms on or off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature.
Man Down Alarms Reset: If pressed while a Man Down feature Alert Tone is playing, the tone is cancelled and feature timers are reset, but it does not turn the Man Down Alarms off. Requires purchase of Man Down feature.
Manual Dial: Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number.
One Touch Access: Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert.
Privacy: Toggles privacy on or off.
Radio Check: Determines if a radio is active in a system.
Radio Enable: Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled.
Radio Disable: Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled.
Remote Monitor: Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators.
Reset Home Channel: Sets a new home channel.
Ring Alert Type: Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting.
Roam Request: Requests to search for a different site.
Scan: Toggles scan on or off.
Silence Home Channel Reminder: Mutes the Home Channel Reminder.
Site Lock On/Off: When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site.
Text Message: Selects the text message menu.
Vibrate Style: Configures the vibrate style.
Voice Announcement On/Off: Toggles voice announcement on or off.
Wi-Fi: Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
Zone: Allows selection from a list of zones.
What are the assignable settings or utility functions?
AF Suppressor: Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off.
All Tones/Alerts: Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Backlight: Toggles display backlight on or off.
Backlight Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level.
Display Mode: Toggles the day/night display mode on or off.
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS): Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off.
Keypad Lock: Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked.
Power Level: Toggles transmit power level between high and low.
Unassigned: Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned.
What do the display icons mean in Connect Plus Mode?
The following icons appear on the display of the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and are channel specific.
| Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) | The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. |
| Bluetooth Not Connected | The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. |
| Bluetooth Connected | The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. |
| High Volume Data | Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. |
| Indoor Location Available | Indoor location status is on and available. (Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware) |
| Indoor Location Unavailable | Indoor location status is on but unavailable due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Bluetooth. (Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware) |
| Mute Mode | Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. |
| Notification | Notification List has items to review. |
| Power Level (L or H) | Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. |
| Tones Disable | Tones are turned off. |
| Option Board | The Option Board is enabled. |
| Option Board Non-Function | The Option Board is disabled. |
| GNSS Available | The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is available. |
| GNSS Not Available/Out of Range | The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. |
| Scan | Scan feature is enabled. |
| Emergency | Radio is in Emergency mode. |
| Secure | The Privacy feature is enabled. |
| Unsecure | The Privacy feature is disabled. |
| Site Roaming | The site roaming feature is enabled. |
| Battery | The number of bars (0 – 4) shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. Blinks when the battery is low. |
| Contact | Radio contact is available. |
| Call Log | Radio call log. |
| Message | Incoming message. |
| Ring Only | Ringing mode is enabled. |
| Silent Ring | Silent ring mode is enabled. |
| Vibrate | Vibrate mode is enabled. |
| Vibrate and Ring | Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. |
| Wi-Fi Excellent | Wi-Fi signal is excellent. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Good | Wi-Fi signal is good. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Average | Wi-Fi signal is average. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Poor | Wi-Fi signal is poor. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
| Wi-Fi Unavailable | Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. (Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e) |
What do the call icons mean?
The following icons appear on your radio display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type.
| Private Call | Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Group Call/Site All Call | Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Phone Call as Private Call | Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. |
| Bluetooth PC Call | Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (number). |
| Dispatch Call | The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. |
| Option Board Individual Call | Indicates an Option Board individual call in progress. |
| Option Board Group Call | Indicates an Option Board group call in progress. |
What do the advanced menu icons mean?
The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
| Checkbox (Empty) | Indicates the option is not selected. |
| Checkbox (Checked) | Indicates the option is selected. |
| Solid Black Box | Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. |
What do the sent item icons for text messages mean?
The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radio display in the Sent Items folder.
| Sent Successfully | The text message is sent successfully. |
| In-Progress | • The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. • The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. |
| Individual or Group Message Read | The text message has been read. |
| Individual or Group Message Unread | The text message has not been read. |
| Send Failed | The text message has not been sent. |
What do the Bluetooth device icons mean?
The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type.
| Bluetooth Data Device | Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. |
| Bluetooth Audio Device | Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. |
| Bluetooth PTT Device | Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). |
What does the LED indicator status mean?
The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio.
| Blinking red | Battery mismatch occurs or radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Auto-Range Transponder System. Mute Mode is enabled. |
| Rapidly blinking red | Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. |
| Blinking green and yellow | Radio is receiving a Call Alert, received a text message or Scan is enabled and is receiving activity. |
| Solid yellow | Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. |
| Double blinking yellow | Radio is actively searching for a new site. |
| Blinking yellow | Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). |
| Solid green | Radio is powering up or transmitting. |
| Blinking green | Radio is powering up, receiving a call or data. |
| Double blinking green | Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. |
What are the different indicator and alert tones?
Indicator Tones:
Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken.
• High pitched tone
• Low pitched tone
• Positive Indicator Tone
• Negative Indicator Tone
Alert Tones:
Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio.
| Continuous Tone | A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. |
| Periodic Tone | Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. |
| Repetitive Tone | A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. |
| Momentary Tone | Sounds only once for a short period of time defined by the radio. |
How do I switch between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus modes?
To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones.
How do I use Roam Request in Connect Plus Mode?
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable.
If there are no sites available:
• The radio displays Searching and Selected Channel Alias and continues to search through the list of sites.
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available.
NOTICE: This is programmed by your dealer.
Press the programmed Roam Request button.
You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>.
How does Site Lock On/Off work in Connect Plus Mode?
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site.
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site.
• The display shows Site Locked.
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked.
• The display shows Site Unlocked.
What is Site Restriction in Connect Plus Mode?
Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating: Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site.
How do I select a zone in Connect Plus Mode?
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types: Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call, Private Call.
1. Access the Zone feature by performing the following:
| Radio Controls | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Zone Selection button | Press the programmed Zone Selection button. |
| Radio menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Zone and press OK to select. |
The current zone is displayed and indicated by a check mark.
2. Select the required zone:
| Radio Control | Steps |
|---|---|
| Up Arrow or Down Arrow | Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow and scroll to the required zone. |
3. Press OK to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen.
How do I use multiple networks in Connect Plus Mode?
If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming.
How do I select a call type in Connect Plus Mode?
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.
If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead.
Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
How do I receive and respond to a radio call in Connect Plus Mode?
Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving.
NOTICE: The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from).
How do I receive and respond to a Group Call in Connect Plus Mode?
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group.
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green.
2. Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
3. Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends.
How do I receive and respond to a Private Call in Connect Plus Mode?
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio.
When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
2. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green.
3. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I receive a Site All Call in Connect Plus Mode?
A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the user’s full attention.
When you receive a Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.
Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending.
You cannot respond to a Site All Call.
NOTICE: The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends.
How do I receive an Inbound Private Phone Call in Connect Plus Mode?
When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.
1. Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen.
2. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I make a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call in Connect Plus Mode?
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call.
1. Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the OK button.
Press * followed by # within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits.
2. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I make a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call in Connect Plus Mode?
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call.
1. Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits.
2. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call in Connect Plus Mode?
When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1.
Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen.
What happens when I receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call in Connect Plus Mode?
When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio speaker.
How do I make a radio call in Connect Plus Mode?
After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
• The Channel Selector Knob.
• A programmed One Touch Access button – The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed.
• The Contacts list.
• Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls only and is dialed using the keypad.
NOTICE: Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission.
How do I make a Group Call using the Channel Selector Knob in Connect Plus Mode?
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group.
1. Select the channel with the active group alias or ID using the Channel Selector Knob.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
3. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias.
4. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
How do I make a Private Call using the Channel Selector Knob or One Touch Access button in Connect Plus Mode?
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone if this feature is not enabled when trying to make a Private Call using Contacts list, Call Log, One Touch Access button, or Channel Selector Knob.
1. Do one of the following:
• Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID using the Channel Selector Knob.
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
3. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status.
4. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display.
How do I make a Site All Call using the Channel Selector Knob in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to a Site All Call.
1. Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias using the Channel Selector Knob.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
3. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call.
4. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
How do I make a Multi-group Call using the Channel Selector Knob in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
NOTICE: Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call.
1. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-group alias or ID.
2. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
How do I make a Private Call with a One Touch Call button in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen.
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
3. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
4. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends.
How do I make a Private Call with the programmable Manual Dial button in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature allows the radio users to make private calls using the programmable manual dial button.
1. Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:.
2. Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID.
3. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
4. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status.
5. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
6. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I make an Outbound Private Phone Call with the programmable Manual Dial button in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:.
2. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press OK to place a call to the entered number.
Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Press * followed by # within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number.
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions.
If OK is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same.
3. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I make an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Phone and press OK to select.
3. Press OK to select Manual Dial. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
4. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press OK to place a call to the entered number.
Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Press * followed by # within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number.
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions.
If OK is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same.
5. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I make an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Phone Number and press OK to select. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
5. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press OK to place a call to the entered number.
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen.
Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Press * followed by # within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number.
If OK is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same.
6. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
What happens while waiting for the channel grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call in Connect Plus Mode?
When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number.
When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number.
If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions.
Long press the Back button to end the call. The display returns to the previous screen.
How do I make a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call in Connect Plus Mode?
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number.
1. Use the keypad to enter the digits. Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Press * followed by # within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits.
2. Press the OK button.
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen.
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended.
3. Do one of the following.
• Press the Back button to return to the Phone Call screen.
• Long press the Back button to end the call.
How do I make a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call in Connect Plus Mode?
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number.
1. Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended.
2. Long press the Back button to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call…. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
How do I respond to the Home Channel Reminder in Connect Plus Mode?
The Home Channel Reminder feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled by using the CPS, the Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound, the first line of the display shows Non and the second line shows Home Channel periodically when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time.
You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:
• Return to the home channel.
• Mute the reminder temporarily by using the programmable button.
• Set a new home channel by using the programmable button.
How do I mute the Home Channel Reminder in Connect Plus Mode?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can temporarily mute the reminder by performing the following action:
Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder programmable button.
The first line of the display shows HCR and the second line shows Silenced.
How do I set a new Home Channel when the Home Channel Reminder occurs in Connect Plus Mode?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel by performing one of the following actions:
• Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
• Set a new home channel via the menu:
a. Press OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Home Channel and press OK to select.
e. Select from the list of valid channels. The display shows a check mark beside the selected home channel alias.
What is Auto Fallback in Connect Plus Mode and how does it work?
Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode.
Indications of Auto Fallback Mode:
When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, “Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls.
Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode:
NOTICE:
• Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters.
• Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped radios also show the message, “Feature not available”.
• Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact.
• Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls.
• Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time (or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios.
Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radio’s normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radio’s normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group.
Returning to Normal Operation:
If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration “beep” when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site (that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode (display indicates Searching).
How do I send a Radio Check in Connect Plus Mode?
If enabled, Radio Check allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs.
1. Access the Radio Check feature using one of the following methods:
| Radio Control | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Radio Check button | a. Press the programmed Radio Check button. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID and press OK to select. |
| Menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select. c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID and press OK to select. d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Check and press OK to select. |
The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
• If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available.
• If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available.
Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor in Connect Plus Mode?
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
NOTICE: Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio.
1. Access the Remote Monitor feature using one of the following methods:
| Radio Control | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Remote Monitor Button | a. Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID and press OK to select. |
| Menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select. c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID and press OK to select. d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial and press OK to select. e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Remote Mon. and press OK to select. |
The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
• If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.
• If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed.
How do I start and stop Scan in Connect Plus Mode?
Scan allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.
NOTICE: This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list.
You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Scan and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Turn On or Turn Off and press OK to select.
• The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.
• The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is enabled.
• The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled.
• The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is disabled.
How do I respond to a transmission during a Scan in Connect Plus Mode?
During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
2. Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green.
3. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen.
If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups.
How does User Configurable Scan work in Connect Plus Mode?
If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (for example, not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List.
Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.
This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list.
How do I edit the Scan List in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If the scan list entry happens to be the currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multi-group, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members.
Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can:
• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list.
• Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu.
NOTICE: A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List.
To enable/disable scan for individual groups:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to View/Edit List and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the desired Group name. If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group.
4. Press OK to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group.
5. Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) and press OK to select. Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation.
The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name.
How do I add or delete a group via the Add Members Menu in the Scan List for Connect Plus Mode?
The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scan candidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates” sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.
If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently selected zone, or to delete a group from the scan list of the currently selected zone.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Scan option and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to <Add Members> and press OK to select. The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n = the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone).
4. Do one of the following:
• If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6.
• If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone.
6. After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press OK to select. Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called “scan candidates”. If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the list of candidate groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added.
8. Press OK when the desired group alias is displayed. If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed.
9. Press OK to accept the displayed message (Add or Delete). If deleting a group from the list, the plus sign (+) will no longer display. If adding a group to the list, the plus sign (+) will display. If attempting to add a group and the list is full, the radio displays List Full. Delete a group before adding a new one.
10. When finished, press the Back button as many times as necessary to return to the desired menu.
What should I understand about Scan Operation in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call.
There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus.
• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display).
• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu.
• You are participating in a call already.
• No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only).
How does Scan Talkback work in Connect Plus Mode?
If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
Scan Talkback Disabled: The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires.
Scan Talkback Enabled: If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group.
NOTICE: If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group.
How do I edit the priority for a Talkgroup in Connect Plus Mode?
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup with higher priority when it is in another call. A tone sounds when the radio switches to the call with higher priority. There are two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 and P2. P1 has higher priority than P2.
NOTICE: If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is configured in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, there are three levels of priority for talkgroups: P0, P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent Emergency Revert Group ID and the highest priority. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Scan and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to View/Edit List and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required talkgroup and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Edit Priority and press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required priority level and press OK to select. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears on the left of the talkgroup.
How do Contacts work in Connect Plus Mode?
Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:
• Private Call
• Group Call
• Multigroup Call
• Site All Call Voice
• Site All Call Text
• Dispatch Call
The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server.
NOTICE: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission.
Access to Contact Lists depends on the zone configuration:
• If only one zone is configured in the radio, the Contact List directly displays the list from the current selected zone.
• If multiple zones are configured in the radio, the Zone Contact Folder displays all zones with identical network IDs as the current selected zone. The user can access the contacts in these zones.
How do I make a Private Call from Contacts in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
3. Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias:
• Select the subscriber alias directly by pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID.
• Use the Manual Dial menu: Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial and press OK to select. If there was previously dialed subscriber alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID. Press OK to select.
4. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
5. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias.
6. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user’s ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I use Call Alias Search in Contacts in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
3. Key in the first character of the required alias, and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to locate the required alias.
4. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth.
5. Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias.
6. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended.
How do I add a new contact in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to New Contact and press OK to select.
4. Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press OK to confirm.
5. Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press OK to confirm.
6. If adding a Radio Contact, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required ringer type and press OK to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alert in Connect Plus Mode?
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Tones/Alert and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Ringers and press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Alert and press OK to select. The current tone is indicated by a check mark.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required tone and press OK to select. A check mark appears beside selected tone.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls in Connect Plus Mode?
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Tones/Alerts and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Ringers and press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Private Call and press OK to select.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Text Message in Connect Plus Mode?
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Tones/Alerts and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Ringers and press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Text Message and press OK to select. The current tone is indicated by a check mark.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required tone and press OK to select. A check mark appears beside selected tone.
How do I select a Ring Alert Type in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator tone or missed call.
For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.
For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.
You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to access the Ring Alert Type menu.
a. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press OK to select.
• Access this feature through the menu.
a. Press OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Tones/Alerts and press OK to select.
e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Ring Alert Type and press OK to select.
f. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press OK to select.
How do I configure Vibrate Style in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature.
You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to access the Vibrate Style menu.
a. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Short, Medium, or Long and press OK to select.
• Access this feature via the menu.
a. Press OK to access the menu.
b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings and press OK to select.
d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Tones/Alerts and press OK to select.
e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Vibrate Style and press OK to select.
f. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Short, Medium, or Long and press OK to select.
What is Escalert (Escalating Alarm Tone Volume) in Connect Plus Mode?
You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert.
How do I view recent calls from the Call Log in Connect Plus Mode?
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can Delete, View Details, or Store calls from the lists.
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Log and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to preferred list (Missed, Answered, or Outgoing) and press OK to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID.
How do I delete a call from a Call List in Connect Plus Mode?
When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Log and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required list (Missed, Answered, or Outgoing) and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias or ID and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Delete and press OK to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press OK to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to No, and press the OK button to return to the previous screen.
How do I view details from a Call List in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Log and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required list (Missed, Answered, or Outgoing) and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias or ID and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to View Details and press OK to select. Display shows details of call list.
How does Call Alert operation work in Connect Plus Mode?
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button.
How do I respond to Call Alerts in Connect Plus Mode?
Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio.
When you receive a Call Alert:
• A repetitive tone sounds.
• The yellow LED blinks.
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
• Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller.
• Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log.
How do I make a Call Alert from the Contact List in Connect Plus Mode?
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts and press OK to select.
3. Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:
• Select the subscriber alias directly: Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias and press OK to select.
• Use the Manual Dial menu: Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial and press OK to select. The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press OK.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Call Alert and press OK to select.
The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed.
How do I make a Call Alert with the One Touch Access button in Connect Plus Mode?
Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.
The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed.
How do I turn on Mute Mode in Connect Plus Mode?
Mute Mode provides an option to the user to silence all audio indicators of the radio. Once Mute Mode feature is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as Emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, the radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions.
NOTICE: This is a purchasable feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
Do one of the following:
• Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-down position momentarily. (Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature can be enabled either through the radio menu or by your system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. IMPORTANT: User can only enable either Man Down or Face Down at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.)
The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
• Positive Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode On.
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen.
• Radio is muted.
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured.
How do I set the Mute Mode Timer in Connect Plus Mode?
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities. Press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Settings. Press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Mute Timer. Press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press OK.
How do I exit Mute Mode in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires.
Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. (NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.)
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
• Negative Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode Off.
• The blinking red LED turns off.
• Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored.
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped.
NOTICE: Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
How does Emergency Operation work in Connect Plus Mode?
An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio.
NOTICE: If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
• Short press: Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds.
• Long press: Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds.
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
• If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
• If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:
• Emergency Call: You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot.
• Emergency Call with Voice to Follow: For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays “hot” in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button.
• Emergency Alert: An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert by using the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to).
Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:
• Regular: Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators.
• Silent: Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission.
• Silent with Voice: The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions.
What happens when receiving an incoming Emergency in Connect Plus Mode?
Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact.
At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency.
Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radio display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details.
How do I save Emergency Details to the Alarm List in Connect Plus Mode?
Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.
1. While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press the Back button. The Exit Alarm List screen displays.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select Yes and press OK to save the emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
• Select No and press OK to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
How do I delete Emergency Details in Connect Plus Mode?
1. While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press the Back button. The Delete screen displays.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select Yes and press OK to delete the emergency details.
• Select No and press OK to return to the Emergency Details screen.
How do I respond to an Emergency Call in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group.
1. When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications.
2. Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission.
3. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display.
How do I respond to an Emergency Alert in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group.
An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation.
What is the Ignore Emergency Revert Call feature in Connect Plus Mode?
This feature enhancement is to provide an option for the radio to ignore an active Emergency Revert Call. To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, the radio must be configured at the Connect Plus Customer Programming Software (CPCPS). When the feature is enabled, the radio does not display Emergency Call indications and does not receive any audio on the default Emergency Revert Group ID. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
How do I initiate an Emergency Call in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice” operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished.
1. Press the programmed Emergency button.
2. Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues.
How do I initiate an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow in Connect Plus Mode?
Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button.
1. Press the programmed Emergency button.
2. The microphone remains active for the “hot mic” time specified in your radio codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green.
3. Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration.
How do I initiate an Emergency Alert in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or “Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for “Silent”, the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for “Emergency Off”. If programmed for “Silent with Voice”, the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert.
Press the orange Emergency button.
Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radio display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm.
Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed.
How do I exit Emergency Mode in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process.
If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system.
If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires.
If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires.
What are Man Down Alarms in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Man Down Alarms are not supported when operating in Fallback mode.
This section describes the Connect Plus Man Down Feature. This is a purchasable feature that may or may not apply to your radio. Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled and programmed for one or more of the Man Down Alarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you whether or not this applies to your radio and which specific Man Down Alarms have been enabled and programmed.
The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alert others when you might be in danger. This is accomplished by programming your radio to detect a certain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/are enabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movement type, and if the condition is not corrected in a certain period of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (if so programmed). At this point you should immediately take one or more of the corrective actions described below, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/have been enabled for your radio. If you do not take corrective action within a certain period of time, your radio automatically starts an Emergency (either an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert).
• Tilt Alarm: When your radio is tilted at or beyond a specified angle for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to the vertical position immediately.
• Anti-Movement Alarm: When your radio is motionless for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, move the radio immediately.
• Movement Alarm: When your radio is in motion for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, stop the radio’s motion immediately.
Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you which of the above alarms (if any) has been enabled through radio programming. It is possible to enable both the Tilt and Anti-Movement Alarms. In that case, the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the first movement violation.
Instead of taking the corrective actions discussed above, you can also prevent the radio from starting the Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using a programmable button, if your radio has been configured in this manner.
How do I turn Man Down Alarms on and off in Connect Plus Mode?
NOTICE: The programmed Man Down button and Man Down settings are configured using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. If you enable Man Down to maximum sensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, the radio automatically restricts Vibrate Style to medium. This function prevents high Vibrate Style from initiating the Man Down emergency feature.
The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button, use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On and Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for your radio. When using the programmable button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch and displays a brief confirmation message.
In order to hear the tones described above when turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for keypad tones.
If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Alarms can be turned On and Off using the menu, perform the following procedure.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Connect Plus and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Man Down Alarm and press OK to select. If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, the Enable option is shown. If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, the Disable option is shown.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Enable or Disable and press OK to select.
How do I reset Man Down Alarms in Connect Plus Mode?
If your radio has been programmed with either a Man Down Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarms menu option, it is possible to reset the Man Down Alarms without turning them On or Off. This stops any Man Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and it also resets the Alarm timers. However, it is still necessary to correct the movement violation by taking the appropriate corrective action described in the Man Down Alarms section. If the movement violation is not corrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone starts playing again.
The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarms depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button, use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for your radio. When using the programmable button to reset the Man Down Alarms, the radio shows a brief confirmation message.
If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure below.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Connect Plus and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Man Down Alarm and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Reset and press OK to select. The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
How does the Beacon feature work in Connect Plus Mode?
The Beacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, a purchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System Administrator can tell you if the Beacon feature applies to your radio.
If your radio has been enabled and programmed for one or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also be enabled for the Beacon feature.
If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert due to one of the Man Down Alarms, and if your radio is also enabled for the Beacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit a high pitched tone approximately once every ten seconds. The interval can vary depending on whether you are talking on your radio. The purpose of the Beacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If your radio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”, the radio’s backlight comes on for a few seconds every time the Beacon tone plays.
You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon tone by using a programmable button, if your radio has been configured in this manner. If your radio does not have the programmable button or menu option, you can stop the Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then on again, or by changing to a different zone (if your radio has been programmed for more than one zone).
How do I turn the Beacon on and off in Connect Plus Mode?
The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Off depends on how your radio is programmed.
Using the programmable button:
If programmed with a Beacon On/Off button, use the button to toggle the Beacon On and Off.
• When using the programmable button to toggle the Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.
• When using the programmable button to toggle the Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.
In order to hear the tones described above when turning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for keypad tones.
Using the menu:
If your radio has been programmed so that the Beacon can be turned On and Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Connect Plus and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Beacon and press OK to select. If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable option is shown. If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable option is shown.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Enable or Disable and press OK to select. The radio shows a brief message to confirm that Man Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).
How do I reset the Beacon in Connect Plus Mode?
If your radio has been programmed with either the Beacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, it is possible to reset the Beacon. This stops the Beacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) without turning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure for resetting the Beacon depends on how your radio is programmed.
Using the programmable button:
If programmed with a Beacon Reset button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. When using the programmable button to reset the Man Down Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmation message.
Using the menu:
If your radio has been programmed so that the Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure below.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Utilities and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Connect Plus and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Beacon and press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Reset and press OK to select. The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
How do I write and send a text message?
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio (DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications.
NOTICE: The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.
1. Access the Text Message feature using one of the following methods:
| Radio Controls | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Text Message button | Press the programmed Text Message button. |
| Menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Messages and press OK to select. |
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Compose and press OK to select. A blinking cursor appears.
3. Use the keypad to type your message. Press # to move one space to the left. Press * or the right arrow key to move one space to the right. Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press # to change text entry method.
4. Press OK once message is composed.
5. If you are sending the message, select the recipient by:
• Pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias and press OK to select.
• Pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial, and press OK to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press OK.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen.
How do I send a Quick Text Message?
Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it.
If you are sending the message, perform the following to select a recipient:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias and press OK to select.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial, and press OK to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press OK.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen.
How do I send a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button?
You can send Quick Text messages using the programmable button programmed by your dealer.
Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed.
How do I access and use the Drafts folder for text messages?
You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
NOTICE: Long press the Back button at any time to return to the Home screen.
Viewing a Saved Text Message:
1. Access the Text Message feature using one of the following methods:
| Radio Controls | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Text Message button | Press the programmed Text Message button. |
| Menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Messages and press OK to select. |
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Drafts and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required message and press OK to select.
Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message:
1. While viewing the message (from Drafts), press OK again.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Edit and press OK to select. A blinking cursor appears.
3. Use the keypad to type your message. Press # to move one space to the left. Press * or the right arrow key to move one space to the right. Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press # to change text entry method.
4. Press OK once message is composed.
5. Select the message recipient by:
• Pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias and press OK to select.
• Pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial, and press OK to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press OK.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon.
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts:
1. Access the Text Message feature (as described in Viewing a Saved Text Message).
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Drafts and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required message and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Delete and press OK to delete the text message.
How do I manage fail-to-send text messages?
You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:
• Resend
• Forward
• Edit
Resending a Text Message:
Press OK to resend the same message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice.
Forwarding a Text Message:
Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID.
1. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Forward and press OK to select.
2. Do the following to select the message recipient:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required alias or ID and press OK to select.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial, and press OK to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press OK.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed.
Editing a Text Message:
Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.
1. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Edit and press OK to select. A blinking cursor appears.
2. Use the keypad to edit your message. Press # to move one space to the left. Press * or the right arrow key to move one space to the right. Press the Backspace key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press # to change text entry method.
3. Press OK once message is composed.
4. Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Send, and press OK to send the message.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Save, and press OK to save the message to the Drafts folder.
• Press the Back button to edit the message.
• Press the Back button again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder.
5. If you are sending the message, select the recipient as described in Forwarding a Text Message (step 2). Message sending indications are similar.
How do I manage sent text messages?
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
NOTICE: Long press the Back button at any time to return to the Home screen.
Viewing a Sent Text Message:
1. Access the Text Message feature:
| Radio Controls | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Text Message button | Press the programmed Text Message button. |
| Menu | a. Press OK to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Messages and press OK to select. |
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Sent Items and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required message and press OK to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message.
Sending a Sent Text Message (Resend, Forward, Edit, Delete):
You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message: Resend, Forward, Edit, Delete.
1. While viewing the message, press OK again.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to one of the following options and press OK to select.
| Option | Steps |
|---|---|
| Forward | Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. (Follow steps for forwarding a message). |
| Edit | Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending it. (Follow steps for editing a message). |
| Delete | Select Delete to delete the text message. |
| Resend | Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Message. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press OK to resend to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. |
If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without any audio or visual indication. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items:
1. Access the Text Message feature (as described in Viewing a Sent Text Message).
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Sent Items and press OK to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Delete All and press OK to select.
4. Choose one of the following:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Yes and press OK to select. The display shows positive mini notice.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to No and press OK to return to the previous screen.
How do I manage received text messages (Inbox)?
When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message: Read, Read Later, Delete.
Reading a Text Message upon receipt:
1. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Read? and press OK to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press OK to return to the Inbox.
• Press OK a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message.
Managing Received Text Messages in the Inbox:
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages: Reply, Forward, Delete, Delete All.
NOTICE: If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press the Back button at any time to return to the Home screen.
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Messages and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Inbox and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to view the messages.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press OK to select the current message, and press OK again to reply, forward, or delete that message.
• Long press the Back button to return to the Home screen.
Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox:
1. Access the Text Message feature (Menu -> Messages or Programmed Button).
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Inbox and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required message and press OK to select.
4. Press OK once more to access the sub-menu.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Reply and press OK to select.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Quick Reply and press OK to select.
A blinking cursor appears.
6. Use your keypad to write/edit your message.
7. Press OK once message is composed. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If not, Message Send Failed is shown and the radio returns to the Resend option screen.
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox:
1. Access the Text Message feature.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Inbox and press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required message and press OK to select.
4. Press OK once more to access the sub-menu.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Delete and press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Yes and press OK to select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox.
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox:
1. Access the Text Message feature.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Inbox and press OK to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Delete All and press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Yes and press OK to select. The display shows Inbox Cleared.
How do I disconnect from Bluetooth Devices?
Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Devices. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required device. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Disconnect. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.
Wait for acknowledgment.
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears.
• The checkmark disappears beside the connected device.
How do I switch the audio route between the internal radio speaker and a Bluetooth device?
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button.
The display shows one of the following results:
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio.
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth.
How do I view Bluetooth device details on my radio?
Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Devices. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required device. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View Details. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I edit the name of an available Bluetooth-enabled device?
Follow the procedure to edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Devices. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required device. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Edit Name. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Enter a new device name. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Device Name Saved.
How do I delete a disconnected Bluetooth device name from the list?
You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Devices. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required device. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Device Deleted.
How do I control the microphone gain value of a connected Bluetooth-enabled device?
This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to BT Mic Gain. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. Press Menu/OK button to select. You can edit the values here.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to increase or to decrease values. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I turn Indoor Location On or Off?
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions.
• Access this feature through the menu.
a. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth and press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to Indoor Location and press Menu/OK button to select.
d. Press Menu/OK button to turn on Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone.
e. Press Menu/OK button to turn off Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone.
• Access this feature by using the programmed button.
a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone.
b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone.
How do I access Indoor Location beacons information?
Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Bluetooth and press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Indoor Location and press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Beacons and press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the beacons information.
How do I access the Job Ticket folder?
Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required Job Ticket. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I log in or out of the remote server?
This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Log In. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I create Job Tickets?
Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Create Ticket. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I send Job Tickets if my radio is configured with one Job Ticket template?
If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket.
1. Use the keypad to type the required room number. Press Menu/OK button to select.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Room Status. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required option. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Send. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I send Job Tickets if my radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template?
If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets.
1. Press Up or Down arrow to the required option. Press Menu/OK button to select.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Send. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I respond to Job Tickets on my radio?
Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required job ticket. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button once more to access the sub-menu.
You can also press the corresponding number key (1–9) to Quick Reply.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required job ticket. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
7. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I delete Job Tickets on my radio?
Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to All folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required Job Ticket. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Menu/OK button again while viewing the Job Ticket.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I delete all Job Tickets on my radio?
Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Job Tickets. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to All folder. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete All. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I start a manual site search?
Follow the procedure to start manual site search when the received signal strength is poor in order to attempt to find a site with better signal.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Site Roaming. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Active Search. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Finding Site.
If the radio finds a new site:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Site <Alias> Found.
If the radio fails to find a new site:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Out of Range.
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The LED turns off.
• The display shows Channel Busy.
How do I toggle Site Lock On or Off?
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site.
• The display shows Site Locked.
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked.
• The display shows Site Unlocked.
How do I configure Word Predict for text entry?
Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Word Predict. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to enable Word Predict. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• Press Menu/OK button to disable Word Predict (this text refers to Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control in error, it should be Word Predict). If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I configure Sentence Cap for text entry?
This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Sentence Cap. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• Press Menu/OK button to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I view custom words in the radio’s dictionary?
You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to My Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to List of Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the list of custom words.
How do I edit custom words saved in my radio?
You can edit custom words saved in your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to My Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to List of Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to the required word. Press Menu/OK button to select.
8. Press Up or Down arrow to Edit. Press Menu/OK button to select.
9. Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
• Press Left arrow key to move one space to the left.
• Press Right arrow key to move one space to the right.
• Press the *< key to delete any unwanted characters.
• Long press #ப key to change text entry method.
10. Press Menu/OK button once your custom word is completed.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved.
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice.
• If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice.
How do I add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary?
You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to My Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Add New Word. Press Menu/OK button to select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
7. Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
• Press Left arrow key to move one space to the left.
• Press Right arrow key to move one space to the right.
• Press the *< key to delete any unwanted characters.
• Long press #ப key to change text entry method.
8. Press Menu/OK button once your custom word is completed.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved.
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice.
• If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice.
How do I delete custom words saved in my radio?
Follow the procedure to delete the custom words saved in your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to My Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required word. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
8. Choose one of the following.
• At Delete Entry?, press Menu/OK button to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to return to the previous screen.
How do I delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary?
Follow the procedure to delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to My Words. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete All. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Do one of the following:
• At Delete Entry?, press Menu/OK button to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No to return to the previous screen. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on my radio?
Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button. Skip the following steps.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Talkaround. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
The screen automatically returns to the previous screen.
How do I monitor channels?
Follow the procedure to monitor channels.
1. Long press the programmed Monitor button.
The Monitor icon appears on the display and the LED lights up solid yellow.
If the channel is in use:
• The display shows the Monitor icon.
• You hear radio activity or total silence.
• The yellow LED lights up.
If the monitored channel is free, you hear a “white noise”.
2. Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen.
How do I turn Permanent Monitor on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Permanent Monitor on or off on your radio.
Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button.
When the radio enters the mode:
• An alert tone sounds.
• The yellow LED lights up.
• The display shows Permanent Monitor On and the Monitor icon.
When the radio exits the mode:
• An alert tone sounds.
• The yellow LED turns off.
• The display shows Permanent Monitor Off.
How do I temporarily mute the Home Channel Reminder?
When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder.
Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder programmable button.
The first line of the display shows HCR and the second line shows Silenced.
How do I set a new home channel when the Home Channel Reminder occurs?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps.
The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
• Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Home Channel. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the desired new home channel alias. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected home channel alias.
How do I send radio checks?
Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Radio Check button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
Wait for acknowledgment.
If you press the Back/Home button when the radio is waiting for acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor using the programmed button?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID.
3. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
4. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor using the Contacts list?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Remote Mon..
5. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
6. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I initiate Remote Monitor using the manual dial?
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
• Edit the previously dialed ID, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Remote Mon..
7. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I view entries in the Scan list on my radio?
Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan list on your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to view each member on the list.
How do I view entries in the Scan list using the alias search?
Follow the procedure to view entries in the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
5. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list.
The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
How do I add new entries to the Scan list on my radio?
Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Add Member. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required priority level. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes to add another entry. Press Menu/OK button to select. Repeat step 5 and step 6.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No to save the current list. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I delete entries from the Scan list?
Follow the procedure to delete entries from the Scan list.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Delete Entry?.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes to delete the entry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No to return to the previous screen. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Repeat step 4 to step 6 to delete other entries.
8. Long press the Back/Home button to return to the Home screen after deleting all required aliases or IDs.
How do I set priorities for entries in the Scan list on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the Scan list on your radio.
1. Press the Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Edit Priority. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required priority level. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias.
How do I turn scan on or off on my radio?
Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio.
NOTICE: While scanning, the radio only accepts data (for example: text message, location, or PC data) if received on its Selected Channel.
1. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select a channel programmed with a scan list.
2. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Scan State. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required scan state and press Menu/OK button to select.
If scan is enabled:
• The display shows Scan On and Scan icon.
• The yellow LED blinks.
If scan is disabled:
• The display shows Scan Off.
• The Scan icon disappears.
• The LED turns off.
How do I respond to transmissions during scanning?
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning.
1. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button during hang time.
The green LED lights up.
2. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
3. Release the PTT button to listen.
The radio returns to scanning other channels or groups if you do not respond within the hang time.
How do I temporarily delete nuisance channels from the scan list?
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise, (termed a “nuisance” channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio.
1. When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone.
2. Release the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button.
The nuisance channel is deleted.
How do I restore nuisance channels on my radio?
Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your radio.
Do one of the following:
• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.
• Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Scan button or menu.
• Change the channel using the Channel Selector Knob.
How do I add new contacts on my radio?
Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to New Contact. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
6. Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to the required ringer type. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I set the default contact on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set the default contact on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Set as Default. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a checkmark beside the selected default alias or ID.
How do I assign entries to programmable number keys on my radio?
Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Program Key. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press Up or Down arrow to the desired number key. Press Menu/OK button to select.
• If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice.
Press Up or Down arrow to No to return to the previous step.
How do I remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on my radio?
Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Program Key. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Empty. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select.
NOTICE: When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved.
The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts on my radio?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the required tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on my radio?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Private Call. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark beside On if Private Call ringing tones are enabled.
The display shows a checkmark beside Off if Private Call ringing tones are disabled.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the required tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on my radio?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Selective Call. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark and the current tone.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the required tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on my radio?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Text Message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark and the current tone.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the required tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark and the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows a checkmark beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show a checkmark beside Off.
How do I activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on my radio?
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Ringers. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Telemetry. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The current tone is indicated by a checkmark.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the preferred tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows Tone <Number> Selected and a checkmark appears left of the selected tone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Turn Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and a checkmark appears left of Turn Off.
How do I assign ring styles for receiving calls or messages from a particular contact?
The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring styles on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to View/Edit. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button until display shows Ringer menu. A checkmark indicates the current selected tone.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required tone. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I select a Ring Alert Type?
NOTICE: The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to access the Ring Alert Type menu.
a. Press Up or Down arrow to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press Menu/OK button to select.
• Access this feature through the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities and press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings and press Menu/OK button to select.
d. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts and press Menu/OK button to select.
e. Press Up or Down arrow to Ring Alert Type and press Menu/OK button to select.
f. Press Up or Down arrow to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & Vibrate or Silent and press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I configure the vibrate style on my radio?
NOTICE: The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature.
You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to access the Vibrate Style menu.
a. Press Up or Down arrow to Short, Medium, or Long and press Menu/OK button to select.
• Access this feature via the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities and press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings and press Menu/OK button to select.
d. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts and press Menu/OK button to select.
e. Press Up or Down arrow to Vibrate Style and press Menu/OK button to select.
f. Press Up or Down arrow to Short, Medium, or Long and press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I enable or disable Escalert (escalating alarm tone volume)?
This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to escalate alarm tone volume on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Escalert.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enable OR disable Escalert. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled. If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I view recent calls on my radio?
Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Log. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the preferred list. The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the most recent entry.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to view the list. You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button.
How do I view call list details on my radio?
Follow the procedure to view call details on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Log. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required list. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View Details. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the call details.
How do I store aliases or IDs from the Call list on my radio?
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Log. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required list. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Store. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a blinking cursor.
6. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press Menu/OK button to select.
You can store an ID without an alias.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I delete calls from the Call list?
Follow the procedure to delete calls from the Call list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Log. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required list. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the list is empty:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows List Empty.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete Entry?. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I respond to Call Alerts on my radio?
Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio.
When you receive a Call Alert:
• A repetitive tone sounds.
• The yellow LED blinks.
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
• Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller.
• Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log.
How do I make Call Alerts using the programmed One Touch Access button?
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I make Call Alerts using the Contacts list?
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select the subscriber alias or ID directly. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
• Use the Manual Dial menu. Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows Radio Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
• If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice.
• If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I turn on Mute Mode?
Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
Do one of the following:
• Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-down position momentarily. (Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature can be enabled either through the radio menu or by your system administrator. IMPORTANT: User can only enable either Man Down or Face Down at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.)
The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
• Positive Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode On.
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen.
• Radio is muted.
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured.
How do I set the Mute Mode Timer?
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Mute Timer. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press Menu/OK button.
How do I exit Mute Mode?
This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires.
Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily.
NOTICE: Face Down feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
• Negative Indicator Tone sounds.
• Display shows Mute Mode Off.
• The blinking red LED turns off.
• Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored.
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped.
NOTICE: Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
How do I send Emergency Alarms?
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent.
Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Emergency On button.
You see one of these results:
• The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias.
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears.
NOTICE: If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed through CPS.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• The Emergency tone sounds.
• The red LED blinks.
• The display shows Alarm Sent.
If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows Alarm Failed.
The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen.
How do I send Emergency Alarms with Call?
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Emergency On button.
You see the following:
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears.
NOTICE: If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by your dealer or system administrator.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• The Emergency tone sounds.
• The red LED blinks.
• The display shows Alarm Sent.
• Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias.
3. Press the PTT button to make the call.
The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon.
4. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
5. Release the PTT button to listen.
The display shows the caller and group aliases.
6. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
7. To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends, press the Emergency Off button.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
How do I send Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow?
Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio.
1. Press the programmed Emergency On button.
You see one of these results:
• The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias.
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears.
2. Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone.
The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
• The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled.
• The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled.
3. Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
What happens when I receive an Emergency Alarm and what are my options?
Follow the procedure to receive Emergency Alarms on your radio.
When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
• A tone sounds.
• The red LED blinks.
• The display shows the Emergency icon, and the Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List.
1. Do one of the following:
• If only one alarm, press Menu/OK button to view more details.
• If more than one alarm, press Up or Down arrow to the required alias, and press Menu/OK button to view more details.
2. Press Menu/OK button to view the action options.
3. Press Back/Home button and select Yes to exit the Alarm list.
4. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
5. Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list.
6. The tone sounds and the LED blinks red until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:
• Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm.
• Press any programmable button.
• Exit Emergency mode.
How do I respond to Emergency Alarms on my radio?
Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio.
1. Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID.
2. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted.
The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode.
3. Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled.
4. Release the PTT button to listen.
When the emergency initiating radio responds:
• The green LED blinks.
• The display shows the Group Call icon and ID, transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list.
Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios, including the emergency receiving radio, transmit non-emergency voice.
How do I exit Emergency mode after receiving an Emergency alarm?
Do one of the following to exit Emergency mode after receiving Emergency alarm:
• Delete the alarm items.
• Power down the radio.
How do I reinitiate Emergency mode (for the radio sending the alarm)?
This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Follow the procedure to reinitiate Emergency mode on your radio.
Do one of the following:
• Change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. The radio exits the Emergency mode, and reinitiates Emergency, if Emergency Alarm is enabled on the new channel.
• Press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation or transmission state. The radio exits this state, and reinitiates Emergency.
When does the radio (sending the alarm) exit Emergency mode and how to exit it manually?
This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm.
Your radio exits Emergency mode when:
• An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency Alarm only).
• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.
• Your radio is turned off.
NOTICE: Your radio does not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is powered up again.
Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on your radio.
Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Emergency Off button.
• Turn off the radio and then, power it on again, if your radio has been programmed to remain on the Emergency Revert channel even after acknowledgment is received.
• Change the channel to a new channel that has no emergency system configured. The display shows No Emergency.
How do I delete an alarm item from the Alarm List to exit Emergency mode?
Follow the procedure to delete the alarm items from the Alarm List, to exit Emergency mode.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Alarm List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alarm item. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I turn the Man Down feature on or off?
NOTICE: The programmed Man Down button and Man Down settings are configured using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
If you disable the Man Down feature, the programmed alert tone sounds repeatedly until the Man Down feature is enabled. A device failure tone sounds when the Man Down feature fails while powering up. The device failure tone continues until the radio resumes normal operation.
You can enable or disable this feature by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Man Down button to toggle the feature on or off.
• Access this feature using the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
d. Press Up or Down arrow to Man Down. Press Menu/OK button to select.
You can also use Up or Down arrow to change the selected option.
e. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable Man Down.
If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I view text messages on my radio?
Follow the procedure to view text messages on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Inbox. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the Inbox is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
• A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application.
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>.
5. Long press the Back/Home button to return to the Home screen.
How do I view a telemetry status text message from the inbox?
Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Inbox. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>.
How do I view saved text messages (drafts)?
Follow the procedure to view saved text message on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Drafts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I respond when I receive a text message?
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio.
When you receive a text message:
• The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender.
• The display shows the Message icon.
NOTICE: The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Read. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Read Later. Press Menu/OK button to select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
2. Press Back/Home button to return to the Inbox.
How do I reply to text messages?
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Inbox. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application.
5. Press Menu/OK button to access the sub-menu.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Reply. Press Menu/OK button to select.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Quick Reply. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A blinking cursor appears. You can write or edit your message, if required.
7. Press Menu/OK button once message is composed.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
How do I forward text messages from the Resend option screen?
Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your radio.
When you are at the Resend option screen:
1. Press Up or Down arrow to Forward, and press Menu/OK button to send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I forward text messages using the manual dial?
Follow the procedure to forward text messages by using the manual dial on your radio.
1. Press Up or Down arrow to Forward. Press Menu/OK button to select.
2. Press Menu/OK button to send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Number:.
4. Enter the subscriber ID, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent.
5. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I edit a text message?
Select Edit to edit the message.
NOTICE: If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it.
1. Press Up or Down arrow to Edit. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a blinking cursor.
2. Use the keypad to edit your message.
• Press Left arrow to move one space to the left.
• Press Right arrow or Space key to move one space to the right.
• Press *< key to delete any unwanted characters.
• Long press #ப key to change text entry method.
3. Press Menu/OK button once message is composed.
4. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Send and press Menu/OK button to send the message.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Save and press Menu/OK button to save the message to the Drafts folder.
• Press Back/Home button to edit the message.
• Press PTT button to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder.
How do I send a newly written or saved text message?
Follow the procedure to send text message on your radio. It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message.
Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent.
If successful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A low tone sounds.
• The display shows negative mini notice.
• The message is moved to the Sent Items folder.
• The message is marked with a Send Failed icon.
NOTICE: For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen.
How do I edit a saved text message?
Follow the procedure to edit saved text message on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button while viewing the message.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Edit. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A blinking cursor appears.
3. Use the keypad to type your message.
Press Left arrow to move one space to the left.
Press Right arrow or #ப key to move one space to the right.
Press *< key to delete any unwanted characters.
Long press #ப key to change text entry method.
4. Press Menu/OK button once message is composed.
Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Send. Press Menu/OK button to send the message.
• Press Back/Home button. Press Up or Down arrow to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I resend text messages from the Resend option screen?
Follow the procedure to resend text messages on your radio.
When you are at the Resend option screen:
Press Menu/OK button to resend the same message to the same subscriber or group alias or ID.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
How do I delete text messages from the Inbox?
Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Inbox. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the Inbox is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
• A tone sounds.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application.
5. Press Menu/OK button to access the sub-menu.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox.
How do I delete all text messages from the Inbox?
Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the Inbox on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Inbox. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the Inbox is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
• A tone sounds.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete All. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
How do I delete saved text messages from the Drafts folder?
Follow the procedure to delete saved text message from drafts on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Drafts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button again while viewing the message.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to delete the text message.
How do I view sent text messages?
Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Sent Items. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the Sent Items folder is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
• A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required message. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application.
How do I resend a text message from the Sent Items folder?
Follow the procedure to send a sent text message on your radio.
When you are viewing a Sent message:
1. Press Menu/OK button while viewing the message.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Resend. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent.
3. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen.
How do I delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder?
Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Messages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Sent Items. Press Menu/OK button to select.
If the Sent Items folder is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
• A tone sounds.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete All. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I send predefined Quick Text messages?
Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen.
How do I turn privacy on or off on my radio?
Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio.
NOTICE: This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Privacy. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to On. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside On.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Off.
How do I disable a radio using the programmed Radio Disable button?
Follow the procedure to disable your radio.
1. Press the programmed Radio Disable button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID.
3. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED blinks.
4. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press the Back/Home button during Radio Enable or Radio Disable operation.
How do I disable a radio using the Contacts list?
Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Disable.
5. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED blinks.
6. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I disable a radio using the manual dial?
Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Number. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
5. Enter the subscriber ID, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Disable.
7. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I enable a radio using the programmed Radio Enable button?
Follow the procedure to enable your radio.
1. Press the programmed Radio Enable button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID.
3. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up.
4. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I enable a radio using the Contacts list?
Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the Contacts list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Enable.
5. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up.
6. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I enable a radio using the manual dial?
Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the manual dial.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Manual Dial. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Private Call. Press Menu/OK button to select. (Note: The PDF says “Private Call” here, which might be a typo and should be “Radio Number” similar to the disable procedure. Assuming “Radio Number” or direct ID entry is intended for enabling specific radio).
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
5. Enter the subscriber ID, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Enable.
7. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up.
8. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I access my radio using a password if it’s password locked?
Follow the procedure to access your radio by using a password.
1. Enter the current four-digit password.
• Press Up or Down arrow to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press Menu/OK button to enter and move to the next digit.
2. Press Menu/OK button to enter the password.
If successful, the radio powers up.
If unsuccessful:
• After the first and second attempt, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1.
• After the third attempt, the display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes.
NOTICE: In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only.
How do I turn password lock on or off on my radio?
Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Passwd Lock. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Enter the current four-digit password.
• Use a keypad microphone.
• Press Up or Down arrow to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press Menu/OK button to enter and move to the next digit. A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit pressed.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enter the password.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Turn On. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Turn On.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Turn Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Turn Off.
How do I unlock my radio if it is in a locked state (after too many wrong password attempts)?
Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state.
Do one of the following:
• If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords to access the radio.
• If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords to access the radio.
How do I change the password on my radio?
Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Passwd Lock. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Enter the current four-digit password, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Change PWD. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Enter a new four-digit password, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
8. Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press Menu/OK button to proceed.
If successful, the display shows Password Changed.
If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match.
The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
How do I access the Notification list on my radio?
Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Notification button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu (This step seems redundant if step 1b is chosen, likely meant as an alternative first step or if already in a sub-menu and P1 is Menu/OK).
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Notification. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required event. Press Menu/OK button to select.
Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen.
How do I turn Wi-Fi on or off?
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements.
You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions.
• Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi.
• Access this feature using the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi On (or current state) and press Menu/OK button to select.
Press Menu/OK button to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows a checkmark beside Enabled.
Press Menu/OK button to turn off Wi-Fi. The checkmark disappears from beside Enabled.
How do I connect to a Wi-Fi network access point?
When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point.
NOTICE: You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
NOTICE: For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Networks and press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to a network access point and press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Connect and press Menu/OK button to select.
6. For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and press Menu/OK button.
7. For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM.
If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point.
If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu.
If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list.
If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu.
How do I check the Wi-Fi connection status?
Follow the procedure to check the Wi-Fi Connection status.
Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection.
• The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off.
• The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network.
• The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network.
NOTICE: The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
How do I refresh the Wi-Fi network list?
Follow the procedure to refresh the network list.
• Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu.
a. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
b. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
c. Press Up or Down arrow to Networks and press Menu/OK button to select.
When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list.
• If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list: Press Up or Down arrow to Refresh and press Menu/OK button to select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list.
How do I add a Wi-Fi network (WPA-Personal) if it’s not in the available list?
NOTICE: This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks.
If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Networks and press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Add Network and press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press Menu/OK button.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Open (or other security type if applicable) and press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Enter the password and press Menu/OK button.
The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved.
How do I view details of network access points?
You can view details of network access points.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Networks and press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to a network access point and press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View Details and press Menu/OK button to select.
NOTICE: WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points.
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi
For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address.
For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode.
WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi
For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2.
For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name.
How do I remove network access points from the profile list (not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi)?
NOTICE: This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks.
Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to WiFi and press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Networks and press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the selected network access point and press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Remove and press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Yes and press Menu/OK button to select.
The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed.
How do I enter Front Panel Programming mode?
Follow the procedure to enter front panel programming mode on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Program Radio. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I lock or unlock the keypad?
Follow the procedure to lock or unlock the keypad of your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button followed by *< key. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Keypad Lock. Press Menu/OK button to select.
• If the keypad is locked, the display shows Keypad Locked.
• If the keypad is unlocked, the display shows Keypad Unlocked.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
How do I turn Automatic Call Forwarding on or off?
You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Call Forward. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to enable Call Forwarding. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• Press Up or Down arrow to disable Call Forwarding. If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I identify/select the type of cable my radio uses?
Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Cable Type. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to change the selected option.
The current cable type is indicated by a checkmark.
How do I turn the Flexible Receive List on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on or off.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Flexible Rx List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Turn On. Press Menu/OK button to select. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Turn Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice.
How do I add new members to the receive talkgroup list (Flexible Receive List)?
Follow the procedure to add new members to the receive talkgroup list.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Flexible Rx List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to Add Member. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?.
8. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes to add another entry. Press Menu/OK button to select. Repeat step 7.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No to save the current list. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I delete members from the receive talkgroup list (Flexible Receive List)?
Follow the procedure to delete members of the receive talkgroup list from your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Flexible Rx List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
7. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
8. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes to delete the entry. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
9. Repeat step 6 to step 8 to delete other entries.
10. Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen after deleting all required aliases or IDs.
How do I delete members from the Flexible Receive List using alias search?
Follow the procedure to delete members of the receive talkgroup list by using alias search.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Flexible Rx List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to View/Edit List. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor.
7. Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results.
8. Press Menu/OK button to select.
9. Press Up or Down arrow to Delete. Press Menu/OK button to select.
10. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Yes to delete the entry. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a positive mini notice.
• Press Up or Down arrow to No. Press Menu/OK button to select. The radio returns to the previous screen.
11. Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen after deleting all required aliases or IDs.
How do I set the time my radio stays in the menu before automatically switching to the Home screen?
You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Display. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Menu Timer. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required setting. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I set the Text-to-Speech feature?
Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Voice Announcement. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to any of the following features. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The available features are as follows:
• All
• Messages
• Job Tickets
• Channel
• Zone
• Program Button
A checkmark appears beside the selected setting.
How do I turn Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off?
The feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed AF Suppressor button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to AF Suppressor. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor.
• Press Menu/OK button to disable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor.
If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled. If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I toggle GNSS on or off on my radio?
NOTICE: Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed.
1. Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio.
• Press the programmed GNSS button.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu. Proceed to the next step.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to GNSS. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable GNSS.
If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I enable or disable the Introduction Screen?
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Display. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Intro Screen. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable the Introduction Screen.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I enable or disable all radio tones and alerts (except Emergency alert tone)?
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone. Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to All Tones. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable all tones and alerts.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the tones and alerts volume offset levels?
This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Vol. Offset. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Up or Down arrow to the required volume offset level. A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level.
7. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to select. The required volume offset level is saved.
• Press Back/Home button to exit. The changes are discarded.
How do I turn Talk Permit Tone on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Talk Permit. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable the Talk Permit Tone.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn Power Up Tone on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Tones/Alerts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Power Up. Press Menu/OK button to select.
6. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable the Power Up Tone.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I customize the text message alert tone for each entry in the Contacts list?
You can customize the text message alert tone for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Contacts. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to the required alias or ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Message Alert. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Momentary. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Momentary.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Repetitive. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Repetitive.
How do I set the power levels (High/Low) on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio.
NOTICE: This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Power. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to High. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside High.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Low. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Low.
6. Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen.
How do I change the display mode of the radio (Day/Night)?
You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Display. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required setting. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected setting.
How do I adjust the display brightness on my radio?
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Brightness. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the progress bar.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to decrease or increase the display brightness. Press Menu/OK button to select.
How do I set the display backlight timer?
You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Follow the procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Display. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to Backlight Timer. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled.
How do I enable or disable the backlight to turn on automatically?
You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Backlight Auto.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable Backlight Auto.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the squelch levels (Normal/Tight) on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your radio.
NOTICE: This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Squelch. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to Normal. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Normal.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Tight. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Tight.
The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
How do I turn the LED indicators on or off?
Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to LED Indicator. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable the LED indicator.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the language on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Languages. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required language. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected language.
How do I turn VOX on or off using the menu?
Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio.
NOTICE: If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to VOX. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to On. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside On.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Off.
How do I turn the option board on or off?
Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio.
Press the programmed Option Board button.
How do I turn Voice Announcement on or off?
This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. Skip the following steps.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Voice Announcement. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable Voice Announcement.
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on or off?
The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Mic AGC-D. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable Digital Microphone AGC.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I turn Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on or off?
The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on an analog system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Analog Microphone AGC on or off on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Mic AGC-A. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Menu/OK button to enable or disable Analog Microphone AGC.
The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and a wired accessory?
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and wired accessory. You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the condition that:
• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.
• The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth accessory.
Press the programmed Audio Toggle button.
A tone sounds when the audio route has switched.
Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.
How do I turn Intelligent Audio on or off?
Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio.
NOTICE: This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Intelligent Audio. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to On. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside On.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Off.
How do I turn Trill Enhancement on or off?
You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill (rolling “R”) pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Trill Enhance. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Up or Down arrow to On. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside On.
• Press Up or Down arrow to Off. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows a checkmark beside Off.
How do I turn the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control feature on or off?
This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Mic Distortion. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Do one of the following:
• Press Menu/OK button to enable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If enabled, a checkmark appears beside Enabled.
• Press Menu/OK button to disable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If disabled, the checkmark disappears beside Enabled.
How do I set the audio ambience on my radio according to my environment?
Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Audio Ambience. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required setting. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The settings are as follows.
• Choose Default for the default factory settings.
• Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings.
• Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected setting.
How do I set audio profiles on my radio?
Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Settings. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Audio Profiles. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required setting. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The settings are as follows.
• Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings.
• Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age.
• Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds.
The display shows a checkmark beside the selected setting.
How do I access battery information on my radio?
Displays information of your radio battery.
NOTICE: For IMPRES batteries only: The display reads Recondition Battery when the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Battery Info. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows the battery information.
How do I check the radio alias and ID?
Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID on your radio.
1. Do one of the following:
• Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen.
• Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to My ID. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID.
How do I check the firmware and codeplug versions on my radio?
Follow the procedure to check the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Versions. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions.
How do I check GNSS information on my radio?
Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of: Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Direction, Velocity, Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP), Satellites, Version.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to GNSS Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
5. Press Up or Down arrow to the required item. Press Menu/OK button to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information.
How do I check the software update information (date/time of last OTAP/Wi-Fi update)?
This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio.
Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to SW Update. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the date and time of the latest software update.
How do I display the current site name my radio is on?
Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Radio Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to Site Info. Press Menu/OK button to select.
The display shows the current site name.
How do I view RSSI values when at the Home screen?
Follow the procedure to view RSSI values on your radio.
When you are at the Home screen:
1. Press Up arrow three times and immediately press Down arrow, all in 5 seconds.
The display shows the current RSSI values.
2. Long press Back/Home button to return to the Home screen.
How do I view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate?
You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate.
1. Press Menu/OK button to access the menu.
2. Press Up or Down arrow to Utilities. Press Menu/OK button to select.
3. Press Up or Down arrow to Certificate Menu. Press Menu/OK button to select.
A checkmark appears beside ready certificates.
4. Press Up or Down arrow to the required certificate. Press Menu/OK button to select.
Your radio displays the full details of the certificate.
NOTICE: For unready certificates, the display shows only Status.
What does the Notifications feature do?
It allows direct access to the list of notifications.
What is Direct Access used for?
Direct Access is used to directly launch a broadcast, individual, telephone, or group call, a call alert, or a predefined quick text message.
What is the Option Board Function?
This function activates or deactivates the option board functions on channels that use them.
What does the Telephone feature allow?
It allows direct access to the telephone contact list.
What does the Encryption feature do?
It activates or deactivates the encryption function.
What does Radio Alias and ID indicate?
It indicates the radio’s alias and ID.
What is Remote Monitoring?
Remote Monitoring activates the microphone of a target radio without indication to the target radio user.
What is the Reset Home Channel feature for?
This feature defines a new home channel.
How do I Mute the Home Channel Reminder?
This feature mutes the home channel reminder.
What information does Site Info provide?
Site Info displays the name and ID of the current Capacity Max site. It also transmits voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is activated.
How does Site Lock work?
When Site Lock is activated, the radio only searches for the current site. When it is deactivated, the radio searches for other sites in addition to the current site.
What is the Status feature used for?
It allows selection of the status list menu.
What can I do with Telemetry Control?
Telemetry Control allows you to control the output pin on a local or remote radio.
What is the Text Message feature for?
This feature selects the text messaging menu.
How do I switch between call priority levels?
This feature allows your radio to switch between high and normal call priority levels.
What is Vibration Enhancement?
This feature allows you to activate and deactivate vibration enhancement.
How do I toggle Voice Announcement?
This feature activates or deactivates the voice announcement function.
How do I activate or deactivate Wi-Fi?
This feature allows you to activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi function.
What is Zone Selection used for?
Zone Selection allows you to select a zone from a list.
What are Tones/Alerts settings for?
This feature allows you to activate and deactivate tones and warnings.
How do I control the Backlight?
This feature activates or deactivates the screen backlight.
How do I adjust Backlight Brightness?
This feature adjusts the brightness level of the backlight.
How do I change the Display Mode?
This feature allows you to alternate between Day and Night display modes.
How do I lock or unlock the keypad?
The Keypad Lock feature allows you to lock and unlock the keypad.
How do I change the Power Level?
This feature alternates the radio’s power level between high or low.
How do I access programmed functions on my radio?
Follow this procedure to access your radio’s programmed functions:
1. Do one of the following:
– Press the programmed key. Then proceed to step 3.
– Press the OK key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down arrow key until you reach the desired menu function, then press the OK key to select that function or enter a sub-menu.
3. Do one of the following:
– Press the Back key to return to the previous screen.
– Press and hold the Back key to return to the home screen.
What happens if I leave the radio in a menu for too long?
The radio automatically exits the menu and returns to the home screen after a period of inactivity.
What do the display icons on my radio indicate?
The following icons may appear on your radio’s display:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Battery | The number of bars (0 to 4) displayed indicates the remaining charge in the battery. The icon blinks when the battery is low. |
| Bluetooth Connected | The Bluetooth function is active. The icon remains lit as long as a remote Bluetooth device is connected. |
| Bluetooth Not Connected | The Bluetooth function is active, but no remote Bluetooth device is connected. |
| Emergency | The radio is in emergency mode. |
| GNSS Function Available | The GNSS function is active. The icon remains lit as long as a position fix is available. |
| GNSS Function Not Available | The GNSS function is active, but is not receiving any satellite data. |
| High Volume Data | The radio is receiving high volume data and the channel is busy. |
| Indoor Location Available | Indoor location status is active and available. (Only applies to the latest software and hardware) |
| Indoor Positioning Not Available | Indoor location status is active, but not available because the Bluetooth function is deactivated or because beacon detection has been suspended by Bluetooth. (Only applies to the latest software and hardware) |
| Mute Mode | Mute mode is active and the speaker is muted. |
| Notification | The notification list includes at least one missed event. |
| Option Board | The Option Board function is active. (Models with Option Board function only.) |
| No Option Board Function | The Option Board function is deactivated. |
| Over-the-Air Programming Timer | Indicates the time remaining before the radio automatically restarts. |
| Power Level (L or H) | The radio is set to Low power or High power. |
| Priority 1 | Indicates Priority 1 Group. |
| Priority 2 | Indicates Priority 2 Group. |
| Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) | The number of bars represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate maximum signal strength. This icon only appears in receive mode. |
| Tone Only | Tone mode is active. |
| Shared Frequency | Indicates that the radio is connected to the shared control channel. |
| Secure | The Encryption function is active. |
| Silent Ring | Silent ring mode is active. |
| Site Roaming | The site roaming function is active. |
| Status | Indicates a new status message. |
| Tones Off | Tones are deactivated. |
| Unsecure | The Encryption function is deactivated. |
| Vibration | Vibration mode is active. |
| Vibrate and Ring | Vibrate and ring mode is active. |
| Wi-Fi Excellent | The Wi-Fi signal is excellent. (Applies only to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models) |
| Wi-Fi Good | The Wi-Fi signal is good. (Applies only to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models) |
| Wi-Fi Medium | The Wi-Fi signal is medium. (Applies only to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models) |
| Wi-Fi Weak | The Wi-Fi signal is weak. (Applies only to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models) |
| Wi-Fi Not Available | The Wi-Fi signal is not available. (Applies only to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models) |
What do the advanced menu icons mean?
The following icons appear next to menu items that offer a choice between two options or that have a sub-menu also offering two options:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Checkbox (checked) | Indicates that the option is selected. |
| Checkbox (empty) | Indicates that the option is not selected. |
| Black Box | Indicates that the selected menu option has a sub-menu. |
What do the Bluetooth device icons mean?
The following icons accompany Bluetooth device list items to inform you about the type of device:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Bluetooth Audio Device | This is an audio device compatible with Bluetooth technology, such as a headset. |
| Bluetooth Data Device | This is a Bluetooth data transfer device, for example, a barcode scanner. |
| Bluetooth PTT Device | This is a PTT (Push-to-Talk) device compatible with Bluetooth technology, such as a PTT-only function device (POD). |
What do the call icons mean?
The following icons appear on the radio screen during a call. These icons also appear in the contact list to indicate the type of alias or ID.
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| PC Call via Bluetooth | Indicates that a PC call via Bluetooth is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the PC call via Bluetooth. |
| High Priority Call | Indicates that the high priority call level is active. |
| Dispatch Call | The dispatch call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatch PC via a third-party text messaging server. |
| Group Call/All Call | This icon appears when a group call or an all call is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the group. |
| Individual Call Non-IP Device | Indicates that an individual call from a non-IP device is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the subscriber. |
| Group Call Non-IP Device | Indicates that a group call from a non-IP device is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the group. |
| Option Board Individual Call | Indicates that an option board individual call is in progress. |
| Option Board Group Call | Indicates that an option board group call is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the group. |
| Group Call as Group/All Call (Phone icon) | Indicates a telephone call that is a group/all call is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the group. |
| Telephone Call as Individual Call (Phone icon) | Indicates a telephone call that is an individual call is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the telephone. |
| Individual Call | This icon appears when an individual call is in progress. In the contact list, it indicates the alias (name) or ID (number) of the subscriber. |
What do the job ticket icons mean?
The following icons appear momentarily on the screen in the Job Tickets folder:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| All Tickets | Indicates all tickets in the list. |
| New Tickets | Indicates new tickets. |
| In Progress | Jobs are in transmission. This appears before indication of success or failure of sending job tickets. |
| Send Failed | Jobs cannot be sent. |
| Send Successful | Jobs were sent successfully. |
| Priority 1 | Indicates priority level 1 for jobs. |
| Priority 2 | Indicates priority level 2 for jobs. |
| Priority 3 | Indicates priority level 3 for jobs. |
What do the warning icons mean?
The following icons appear momentarily on the radio screen when a task is being executed:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Transmission Failed (negative) | The executed action did not succeed. |
| Transmission Successful (positive) | The executed action succeeded. |
| Transmission in Progress (transient) | Transmission in progress. This icon appears before the indication of success or failure of the transmission. |
What do the sent item icons mean for text messages?
The following icons appear in the upper right corner of the screen in the Sent Messages folder:
| Icon Description | Meaning |
|---|---|
| In Progress | The text message destined for an alias or a subscriber ID is pending transmission and will then await confirmation. The text message destined for an alias or a group ID is pending transmission. |
| Personal or Group Message Read | The text message has been read. |
| Personal or Group Message Unread | The text message has not been read. |
| Send Failed | The text message cannot be sent. |
| Send Successful | The text message has been sent. |
What does the LED indicator on the radio show?
The LED indicator shows the radio’s operational status:
Blinking Red:
– The radio has not passed the self-test upon powering up.
– The radio is receiving an emergency transmission.
– The radio is transmitting with a low battery level.
– The radio is now out of the coverage zone if the ARTS function is configured.
– Mute Mode is active.
Solid Green:
– The radio is powering up.
– The radio is transmitting.
– The radio is sending a call alert or an emergency transmission.
Blinking Green:
– The radio is receiving a call or data.
– The radio is retrieving over-the-air programming transmissions.
– The radio is detecting radio communication activity. (Note: This activity may or may not affect the radio’s programmed channel due to the nature of the digital data protocol.)
Double Blinking Green:
– The radio is receiving an encrypted call or data.
Solid Yellow:
– The radio is in Bluetooth Discovery mode.
Blinking Yellow:
– The radio has not yet responded to a call alert.
Double Blinking Yellow:
– The Automatic Roaming function is activated.
– The radio is actively searching for a new site.
– The radio has not yet responded to a group call alert.
– The radio is locked.
What types of audio tones does the radio use?
The radio uses audio tones to audibly inform you of status or respond to data reception:
Continuous Tone: The radio emits a monophonic signal. It sounds continuously until it ceases.
Periodic Tone: The sound signal sounds periodically according to the radio’s settings. It starts, stops, then resumes.
Repetitive Tone: A single sound signal sounds and repeats until the user ends it.
Temporary Tone: A sound heard once for a short period defined by the radio.
The radio also uses high and low tones.
What do warning tones indicate?
Warning tones audibly inform you of the status of a task after you have initiated it. There is a success tone and a failure tone.
What does it mean when my radio displays “Enregistrement” (Registration)?
Generally, registration is sent to the system during power-up, a change of call group, or during site roaming. If a radio fails to register on a site, it automatically tries to connect to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list.
The indication means the radio is busy searching for a site for roaming or has successfully found a site but is awaiting a response to registration messages.
When “Enregistrement” (Registration) is displayed on the radio, a tone sounds and the yellow LED light double blinks to indicate a site search.
If these indications persist, the user should change locations or, if authorized, manually connect to another site.
What does “Hors de portée” (Out of Range) mean on my radio?
A radio is considered out of range when it is unable to detect a signal from the current system or site. Generally, this indication means the radio is outside the radio frequency coverage range of the outgoing geographical area.
When “Hors de portée” (Out of Range) is displayed on the radio, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED light blinks.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still indicates it is out of range while in an area with good RF coverage.
What happens if there is a Call Group Affiliation Failure?
A radio attempts to affiliate with the call group specified in the channels or the unified knob position (UKP) during registration.
A radio in a state of affiliation failure cannot make or receive calls from the call group it is trying to affiliate with.
When a radio is unable to affiliate with a call group, “UKP alias” (KP alias) is displayed on the home screen with a highlighted background.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives indications of affiliation failure.
What does “Enregistrement refusé” (Registration Denied) mean?
Registration denied indicators are received when registration with the system is not accepted.
The radio does not indicate to the user the exact reason for the registration denial. Normally, registration is denied when the system operator has deactivated the radio’s access to the system.
When registration is denied, “Refus enregistrem.” (Registration denied) is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED light double blinks to indicate a site search.
How do I select a zone on my radio?
Your radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250 Capacity Max zones, with a maximum of 160 channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions.
Follow this procedure to select the required zone on your radio:
1. Do one of the following:
– Press the programmed Zone Selection key. Proceed to step 3.
– Press the OK key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down arrow key until “Zone” is displayed. Press the OK key to select. The screen displays a checkmark and the current zone.
3. Press the Up or Down arrow key until the desired zone is displayed. Press the OK key to select. The screen displays “<Zone> selected” for a moment and then returns to the selected zone screen.
How do I select a zone using the alias search?
Follow this procedure to select the desired zone using the alias search:
1. Press the OK key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down arrow key until “Zone” is displayed. Press the OK key to select. The screen displays a checkmark and the current zone.
3. Enter the first character of the desired alias. The screen displays a blinking cursor.
4. Enter the remaining characters of the desired alias.
– The alias search is not case-sensitive.
– If two or more entries have the same name, the radio displays the entry that appears first in the list.
– The first line of text displays the characters you have entered. The next line of text displays the search results.
5. Press the OK key to make the selection. The screen displays “<Zone> selected” for a moment and then returns to the selected zone screen.
How do I select a call type?
Use the channel selector knob to select a call type. It can be a group call, a broadcast call, an all call, or an individual call, depending on your radio’s programming. If you change the position of the channel selector knob (to a position where a call type is affected), the radio will re-register on the Capacity Max system. The radio registers using the group call ID that was programmed for the new call type of the channel selector knob’s position.
Since your radio cannot function when a non-programmed channel is selected, use the channel selector knob to select a programmed channel.
When the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones on your radio), turn the channel selector knob to select the call type.
How does site selection work on Capacity Max?
A site provides coverage for a particular area. In multisite networks, the Capacity Max radio automatically searches for a new site when the signal strength of the current site drops below an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites.
How do I request roaming to a new site?
A roaming request tells the radio to search for another site, even if the current site’s signal is acceptable.
If no site is available:
– The radio screen displays “Searching” and continues to search through the list of sites.
– The radio will return to the previous site if it is still available.
This is programmed by your dealer.
To manually request roaming:
Press the programmed Manual Site Roaming key.
A tone sounds to indicate that the radio has moved to a new site. The screen displays “Site ID <Site Number>”.
How do I activate or deactivate Site Lock?
When this function is activated, the radio only searches for the current site. When it is deactivated, the radio searches for other sites in addition to the current site.
Press the programmed Site Lock key.
If the Site Lock function is activated:
– A success tone sounds to indicate that the radio has locked onto the current site.
– The screen displays “Site Locked”.
If the Site Lock function is deactivated:
– A failure tone sounds to indicate that the radio is unlocked.
– The screen displays “Site Unlocked”.
What is Site Failsoft (Site FAS) mode?
A site must be able to communicate with the Site Failsoft (FAS) controller to be considered an FAS system.
If the site fails to communicate with the Site FAS controller, then the radio enters Site FAS mode. When in Site FAS mode, the radio sends a periodic audible and visual indication to inform the user of its limited functionality.
When a radio is in Site FAS, the radio displays “Shared Res. Site” and a repetitive tone is heard.
Radios in Site FAS mode are still able to make individual or group voice calls, as well as send text messages to other radios on the same site. Voice consoles, logging recorders, telephone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate with radios on the site.
Once it is in Site FAS mode, a radio participating in calls on multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites may be lost.
If there are multiple sites covering the radio’s current location and one of the sites enters Site FAS mode, the radios will connect to another site within coverage.
How can I initiate calls on the radio?
You can choose a subscriber alias or ID, or a group alias or ID once you have selected a channel using one of these functions:
– Alias Search: This method is used only to make a group call, an individual call, or an all call from the keypad microphone.
– Contacts List: This method allows direct access to the list of contacts.
– Manual Dial (from Contacts): This method is used only to make an individual call or a telephone call from the keypad microphone.
– Programmed Numeric Keys: This method is used only to make a group call, an individual call, or an all call from the keypad microphone. You can assign only one alias or ID to a numeric key, but you can assign more than one numeric key to an alias or ID. All numeric keys on the keypad microphone can be assigned.
– Direct Access Programmed Key: This method is used only to make group, individual, and telephone calls. You can assign only one ID to a direct access programmable key with a long or short press. You can program multiple direct access keys on the radio.
– Programmable Button: This method is used only to make a telephone call.
How do I make a group call?
Your radio must be configured as part of a group to be able to receive a call from a group of users or to make a call to a group of users.
Follow this procedure to make group calls from the radio:
1. Do one of the following:
– Select the channel that corresponds to the group alias or ID.
– Press the programmed direct access key.
2. To make the call, press the PTT (Push-to-Talk) button.
The green LED lights up. The Group Call icon and the alias are displayed on the first line of the screen.
3. Do one of the following:
– Wait for the end of the talk permit tone (if it is activated) and speak clearly into the microphone.
– Wait for the end of the local PTT effect (if it is activated) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen.
The green LED lights up when the target radio replies. The screen displays the Group Call icon, and the alias or ID of the transmitting radio.
5. If the Talk Permit Indication is activated, a short warning tone is heard when the user of the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating that the channel is free and you can respond. To make the call, press the PTT button.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a pre-programmed duration.
The initiator of the call can press the End Call key to end a group call.
How do I make a group call using the contacts list?
Follow this procedure to make group calls using the contacts list from the radio:
1. Press the OK key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down arrow key until “Contacts” is displayed. Press the OK key to select.
3. Press the Up or Down arrow key until the desired alias or ID is displayed. Press the OK key to select.
4. To make the call, press the PTT button.
The green LED lights up.
The alias or ID of the subscriber is displayed on the first line of the screen. The message “Group Call” and the Group Call icon are displayed on the second line.
5. Do one of the following:
– Wait for the end of the talk permit tone (if it is activated) and speak clearly into the microphone.
– Wait for the end of the local PTT effect (if it is activated) and speak clearly into the microphone.
6. Release the PTT button to listen.
The green LED lights up when the target radio replies. The screen displays the Group Call icon, and the alias or ID as well as the alias or ID of the transmitting radio.
7. If the Talk Permit Indication is activated, a short warning tone is heard when the user of the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating that the channel is free and you can respond. To make the call, press the PTT button.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a pre-programmed duration.
The initiator of the call can press the End Call key to end a group call.
A short tone sounds. The screen displays “Call Ended”.
What does the LED indicator show for encrypted calls and how do I decode them?
The LED indicator turns solid green when the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when receiving an encrypted call. To decode an encrypted call, your radio must have the same encryption key OR the same key values and key ID (programmed by the dealer) as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from).
How do I receive and respond to a group call?
To be able to receive a call from a group of users, your radio must first be configured as a part of that group. If you receive a group call (from the home screen), the LED blinks green. The group call icon appears in the upper right corner. The caller alias is displayed on the first line of the screen. The group alias is displayed on the second line of the screen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call is heard through the speaker.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth. The LED indicator turns solid green.
2. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
3. Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends.
How do I receive and respond to an individual call?
When you receive an Individual Call, the LED blinks green. The individual call icon is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The caller’s alias is displayed on the first line of the screen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call is heard on the radio’s speaker.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
2. To answer the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green.
3. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. A short tone sounds. The screen displays Call Ended.
What happens when I receive a Site All Call and can I respond to it?
A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio transmitted to all radios on the site. It is mainly used for important announcements requiring full user attention.
Upon receiving a Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green.
The group call icon appears in the upper right corner. The caller’s alias is displayed on the first line of the screen. Site All Call is displayed on the second line of the screen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call is heard on the speaker.
Once the Site All Call is over, the radio returns to the screen it was on before receiving the call. Site All Calls do not wait for a predetermined time before ending.
You cannot respond to a Site All Call.
What happens if I change the channel during a Site All Call or try to use programmed key functions?
The radio interrupts the All Call reception if you change channel during the call. During an All Call, you cannot use the programmed key functions until the call is over.
How do I receive and respond to an incoming private telephone call?
When you receive an incoming private call, the phone call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner. The first line of text displays Phone Call.
1. To answer and talk, press and hold the PTT button. Release the PTT button to listen.
2. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The phone call screen is displayed. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
How do I perform overdialing from the buffer during an incoming private telephone call?
During the call, the Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays the message Phone Call.
1. Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the OK button. Press * key, followed by # key within 2 seconds, to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays the entered digits.
2. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The phone call screen is displayed. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
How do I perform live overdialing during an incoming private telephone call?
During the call, the Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays the message Phone Call.
1. Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays the live dialing digits.
2. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The phone call screen is displayed. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
How do I receive and respond to an incoming Talkgroup call?
When you receive a Talkgroup call, the group call icon is displayed in the upper right corner. The first line of the screen displays Call1.
Press the PTT key to talk and release the key to listen.
What happens when I receive an incoming Multigroup Call?
When you receive a multigroup call, the group call icon is displayed in the upper right corner. The first line displays Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multigroup call tone is heard on the speaker.
How can I make a radio call?
After selecting a channel, you can choose a subscriber or group alias or ID using the following elements:
• The Channel Selector Knob.
• A programmed One Touch Call button – The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a private call to a predefined ID. You can assign this feature to a programmable button with a short or long press. You can only assign one ID to a One Touch Call button. You can program multiple One Touch Call buttons on the radio.
• The Contact List.
• Manual Dialing – This method applies only to private calls and requires the keypad.
What is required to send and decode encrypted transmissions?
Your radio’s encryption feature must be enabled for that channel to be able to send encrypted transmissions. Only a target radio with the same key values and key ID as your radio can decode the transmission.
How do I make a group call using the channel selector knob?
To be able to make a call to a group of users, your radio must first be configured as part of that group.
1. Select the channel that corresponds to the highlighted group alias or ID.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
3. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator lights solid green. The group call icon is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The group call alias is displayed on the first line of text.
4. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response is heard on the speaker. The group call icon, the group alias or ID, and the alias or ID of the transmitting radio are displayed on the screen. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. The radio returns to the screen you were on before making the call.
How do I make a private call using the channel selector knob or programmed direct access key?
Although you can receive a private call made by an authorized individual radio and respond to it, your radio must have been preprogrammed to allow you to make a private call.
If this feature is not enabled, a failure tone is heard when you attempt to make a private call via the contact list, call log, direct access key, or channel select knob. Use the text messaging or call alert features to communicate with an individual radio.
1. Perform one of the following operations:
• Select the channel that corresponds to the highlighted subscriber alias or ID.
• Press the programmed Direct Access key.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
3. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The private call icon is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The subscriber’s alias is displayed on the first line of the screen. The call status is displayed on the second line of the screen.
4. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. A short tone sounds. The screen displays Call Ended.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check before establishing the private call. If the target radio is not available, a short tone sounds and a brief failure notice is displayed on the screen.
How do I make a Site All Call using the channel selector knob?
This function allows you to transmit a call to all users on the site who are not currently in communication on another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
Channel or site users cannot respond to the Site All Call.
1. Select the channel that corresponds to the highlighted Site All Call group alias.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
3. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The group call icon is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays Site All Call.
4. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
How do I make a Multigroup Call?
This function allows you to transmit to all users of multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
Group users cannot respond to a Multigroup Call.
1. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the multigroup alias or ID.
2. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The screen displays the multigroup alias or ID. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
How do I make a One Touch Private Call?
Programmable buttons must be pressed from the home screen.
The one touch call feature allows you to easily make a private call to a predefined alias or ID. You can assign this feature to a short or long programmable button press. You can only assign ONE alias or ID to a one touch call button. You can program multiple one touch call buttons for your radio.
1. Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a private call to a predefined private call alias or ID.
2. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
3. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The screen displays the private call alias or ID.
4. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
5. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends.
How do I make a private call using the Manual Dial programmable key?
This feature allows the radio user to make private calls using the manual dial programmable key.
1. Press the programmed Manual Dial key to display the manual dial screen. The screen displays Number:.
2. Use the keypad to enter a private ID or subscriber alias.
3. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
4. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The private call icon is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The subscriber’s alias is displayed on the first line of the screen. The call status is displayed on the second line of the screen.
5. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
6. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. A short tone sounds. The screen displays Call Ended.
How do I make an outgoing private telephone call using the Manual Dial programmable button?
1. Press the programmed Manual Dial key to display the manual dial screen. The screen displays Number:.
2. Use the keypad to enter a phone number and press the OK button to send the call to that number.
Press the Left Arrow key to delete unwanted characters. Press * key, followed by # key within 2 seconds, to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the screen displays Phone Call. The second line of the screen displays the dialed phone number.
If an incorrect phone number is selected, the screen displays a negative mini-notice: Call Failed, Resource Unavailable, or Invalid Authorizations.
If you press the OK button and no phone number has been entered, the radio sounds a positive indication tone followed by a negative tone. The display does not change.
3. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
How do I make an outgoing private telephone call using the phone menu?
1. Press the Menu key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Phone is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
3. Press the OK key to select Manual Dial. The first line of the screen displays Number and the second line displays a blinking cursor.
4. Use the keypad to enter a phone number and press the OK key to send the call to that number.
Press the Left Arrow key to delete unwanted characters. Press * key, followed by # key within 2 seconds, to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the screen displays Phone Call. The second line of the screen displays the dialed phone number.
If an incorrect phone number is selected, the screen displays a negative mini-notice: Call Failed, Resource Unavailable, or Invalid Authorizations.
If you press the OK button and no phone number has been entered, the radio sounds a positive indication tone followed by a negative tone. The display does not change.
5. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
How do I make an outgoing private telephone call from Contacts?
If Manual Phone Dialing is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, Phone No. is not displayed in the menu.
1. Press the Menu key to access the menu.
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Contacts is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
3. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Manual Dial is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
4. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Phone Number is displayed, then press the OK key to select. The first line of the screen displays Number and the second line displays a blinking cursor.
5. Use the keypad to enter a phone number and press the OK key to send the call to that number. If the PTT button is pressed, the screen displays a negative mini-notice Press OK to send and returns to the previous screen.
Press the Left Arrow key to delete unwanted characters. Press * key, followed by # key within 2 seconds, to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the screen displays Phone Call. The second line of the screen displays the dialed phone number.
If you press the OK button and no phone number has been entered, the radio sounds a positive indication tone followed by a negative tone. The display does not change.
6. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
What happens during the channel grant wait time for an outgoing private call?
When you make a private call, the first line of the screen displays Phone Call. The second line of the screen displays the dialed phone number.
Once the call is connected, the Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of the screen displays the phone number.
In case of failure, the screen displays a negative mini-notice: Call Failed, Resource Unavailable, or Invalid Permissions (Invalid Authorizations).
Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The radio returns to the previous screen.
How do I perform overdialing from the buffer during an outgoing private telephone call?
During the call, the Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of text on the screen displays the phone number.
1. Use the keypad to enter the digits. Press the Left Arrow key to delete unwanted characters. Press * key, followed by # key within 2 seconds, to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first line of the screen displays the text Suppl. Digits and the second line of the screen displays the supplementary digits.
2. Press the OK button. If the PTT button is pressed, the screen displays a negative mini-notice Press OK to send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of text on the screen displays the phone number with the supplementary digits (overdial).
3. Perform one of the following operations:
• Press the Back key to return to the phone call screen.
• Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call.
How do I perform live overdialing during an outgoing private telephone call?
During the call, the Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of text on the screen displays the phone number.
1. Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call icon as private call is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The first line of text on the screen displays the phone number with the supplementary digits (overdial).
2. Press and hold the End Call softkey to end the call. The first line of the screen displays the message End. The second line of the screen displays Phone Call. The screen displays Phone Call Ended.
What is the Home Channel Reminder feature?
This feature allows a reminder if the radio is not set to the home channel for a certain time. If this feature is enabled by the CPS, the home channel reminder tone and sound alert are heard. Also, the first line of the screen displays Not and the second Home channel repeatedly when the radio is not set to the home channel for a certain time.
How can I interrupt the Home Channel Reminder?
You can interrupt the reminder broadcast by performing one of the following actions:
• Return to the Home Channel.
• Temporarily mute the alert using the programmable button.
• Set a new Home Channel using the programmable button.
How do I mute the Home Channel Reminder?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can mute it by following this procedure:
Press the programmed Home Channel Reminder Mute button. The first line of the screen displays HCR and the second Muted.
How do I set a new Home Channel?
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel by performing one of the following actions:
• Press the programmed Reset Home Channel button. The first line of the screen displays the channel alias and the second New. home ch.
• Set a new Home Channel via the menu:
a. Press the Menu key to access the menu.
b. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Utilities is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
c. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Radio Settings is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
d. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until Home Channel is displayed, then press the OK key to select.
e. Select a valid channel from the list. The screen displays a checkmark next to the selected home channel alias.
What is the Automatic Site Roaming (Fallback) feature in Connect Plus?
Automatic Site Roaming (Fallback) is a system feature that allows the radio to continue making and receiving non-urgent calls in the selected contact group if certain types of Connect Plus system failures occur.
If such a failure occurs, your radio attempts to roam to another Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding either a functional Connect Plus site or a “fallback channel” (if Automatic Site Roaming is enabled on your radio). A fallback channel is a repeater that is usually part of a functional Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In fallback mode, the repeater operates as a “standalone” digital repeater. Fallback mode only supports non-urgent group calls. No other call types are supported in fallback mode.
What are the indications when the radio is in Site Trunking Fallback Mode?
When your radio is using a fallback channel, you may hear an intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximately every fifteen seconds (except during transmission). The screen briefly displays the message “Fallback Channel” periodically. Your radio only allows PTT with the selected contact group (group call, multigroup call, or site all call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls.
How do I receive and make calls in Fallback Mode, and what are the limitations?
Limitations in Fallback Mode:
• Calls are only heard by radios listening to the same fallback channel and selected to the same group. Calls are not networked to other sites or repeaters.
• Neither emergency voice calls nor emergency alerts are available in fallback mode. If you press the Emergency button in fallback mode, the radio emits an invalid key tone. Radios with a display also show the message “Feature not available”.
• Private calls (radio-to-radio) and phone calls are not available in fallback mode. If you attempt to call an individual contact, you will receive a busy tone. At this point, you must select a desired group contact. Other unsupported call types include: ambient listen, call alert, radio check, radio enable, radio disable, text messaging, location update, and packet data calls.
• Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in fallback mode. If two or more radio users press the PTT button at the same time (or nearly the same time), it is possible for both radios to transmit until the PTT button is released. In this case, it is possible that no transmission will be understood by the receiving radios.
To make calls in fallback mode, proceed as for normal operation. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the usual radio channel selection method), then press the PTT button to make your call. It is possible that the channel is already in use by another group. If the channel is already in use, a “busy” tone sounds and the screen displays “Channel Busy”. You can select group, multigroup, or site all call contacts using the usual radio channel selection method. When the radio is used on the fallback channel, multiple groups function like other groups. It can only be heard by radios that have selected the same multigroup.
How does the radio return to normal operation from Fallback Mode?
If the site returns to normal MOTOTRBO operation while you are within range of the fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits fallback mode. A beep sounds when your radio is registered. If you are within range of a functional site (not in fallback mode), you can press the Roam Request button (if this feature is programmed in your radio) to force your radio to search for an available site and register there. If no other site is available, your radio returns to fallback mode once the search is complete. If you move out of the coverage area of your fallback repeater, your radio enters search mode (the screen displays Searching).
How do I send a Radio Check?
When enabled, the Radio Check feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification appears on the target radio. This feature is only available for subscriber aliases or IDs.
1. Access the Radio Check feature.
| Radio Command | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Radio Check button |
a. Press the programmed Radio Check button. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID, then press OK to select. |
| Menu |
a. Press Menu to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts, then press OK to select. c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID, then press OK to select. d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Radio Check, then press OK to select. |
The screen displays the target alias indicating the request is in progress. The LED turns solid green.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the screen briefly displays the message Target Radio Available.
If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the screen briefly displays the message Target Radio Not Available.
The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when the command is activated from the menu. The radio returns to the home screen if the command is activated from the programmable button.
What is the Remote Monitor feature and how do I use it?
Use the Remote Monitor feature to activate the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or ID only). The LED will blink green once on the targeted subscriber. You can use this feature to remotely listen to any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. The remote monitor stops automatically after a programmed duration or on any transmission attempt, channel change or radio power down.
1. Access the Remote Monitor feature.
| Radio Command | Steps |
|---|---|
| Programmed Remote Monitor button. |
a. Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID, then press OK to select. |
| Menu |
a. Press Menu to access the menu. b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Contacts, then press OK to select. c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the required subscriber alias or ID, then press OK to select. d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Manual Dial, then press OK to select. e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Remote Monitor, then press OK to select. |
The first line of the screen displays Remote. Monitor. The second line displays the target alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED turns blinking green.
2. Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful, a success tone sounds and the screen displays the message Remote Monitor. Successful Listen. Your radio receives audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration, and the screen displays Monitor Listen, followed by the target alias. When the timer expires, the radio sounds a warning tone and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful, a negative indication tone sounds and the screen displays the message Remote Monitor. Listen Failed.
How do I start and stop Scan?
This procedure enables or disables scanning for all Connect Plus zones with the same network ID as the currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when scanning is enabled through this procedure, scanning may still be disabled for some (or all) of your scan list groups.
You can start or stop a scan by pressing the programmed Scan button OR by following the procedure below.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Scan is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until On or Off is displayed, then press OK to select.
• The screen displays Scan Enabled when scan is enabled.
• The Scan menu displays the message Off if scan is enabled.
• The screen displays Scan disabled when scan is disabled.
• The Scan menu displays the message On if scan is disabled.
How do I respond to a transmission during a scan?
When performing a scan, your radio stops on a group if it detects activity. The radio continuously scans for members of the scan list when it is on the control channel.
1. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
2. Press the PTT button during the hang time. The LED indicator turns solid green.
3. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4. Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond before the hang time expires, the radio resumes scanning other groups.
What is User-Configurable Scan and its limitations?
If the Edit List menu is enabled, the user can add or delete scan list members from the Add Member menu. A scan list member must be a regular group contact (e.g., not a multigroup or site/network all call contact) that is currently assigned to a channel selector position in a Connect Plus zone with the same network ID as the currently selected zone. Also, the group alias must not match any group already included in the current zone’s scan list.
Scanning can be enabled or disabled via the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.
This feature is only accessible if the radio is not in an active call. If you are in an active call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls and therefore will not detect any. Once the call is over, your radio returns to the control channel timeslot and is able to scan for groups in the scan list.
How can I edit the scan list, and what are the considerations?
If the scan list entry is in the currently selected group, the radio checks if there is activity in that group, whether or not there is a checkmark in front of the list entry. When a radio is not in an active call, the radio checks if there is activity in the selected group, the multigroup, the site all call, and its default emergency cancel group (if configured). This operation cannot be disabled. If scanning is enabled, the radio also checks if there is activity with the enabled members of the zone scan list.
Your scan list determines the groups that can be scanned. The list is created during radio programming. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can:
• Enable or disable scanning of individual groups in the list.
• Add or delete scan list members from the Add Member menu.
How do I enable or disable scanning of individual groups in the scan list?
A scan list member must be a regular group contact (and not a multigroup or site/network all call contact) that is currently assigned to a channel selector position in a Connect Plus zone with the same network ID as the currently selected zone. Also, the group alias must not match any group already included in the current zone’s scan list.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until View/Edit List is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired group name is displayed. If there is a checkmark in front of the group name, scanning is currently enabled for that group. If there is no checkmark in front of the group name, scanning is currently disabled for that group.
4. Press OK to select the desired group. The screen displays Enable if scanning is disabled for the group. The screen displays Disable if scanning is enabled for the group.
5. Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable), then press OK to select. Depending on the selected option, the radio briefly displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation.
The radio displays the zone scan list again. If scanning is enabled for the group, the checkmark is displayed in front of the group name. If scanning is disabled for the group, the checkmark is removed from in front of the group name.
How do I add or delete a group from the scan list using the Add Member menu?
The Connect Plus radio does not allow duplicate group numbers or aliases to be inserted into a zone scan list (or to be displayed as “scan candidates”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates” described in step 6 and step 7 sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.
If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Member menu to add a group to the currently selected zone’s scan list or to delete a group from the currently selected zone’s scan list.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Scan is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to
4. Perform one of the following operations:
• If the group you wish to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in this zone, proceed to step 6.
• If the group you wish to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in another Connect Plus zone, proceed to step 5.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through a list of Connect Plus zones with the same network ID as the currently selected zone.
6. After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press OK to select. Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel selector position in this zone. The groups in the list are called “scan candidates” because they can be added to your currently selected zone’s scan list (or they are already in the zone’s scan list). If the zone does not contain any group that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays the message No Candidate.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the list of candidate groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before a group’s alias, this indicates that the group is currently in the selected zone’s scan list. If a plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before a group’s alias, this means that the group is not currently in the scan list, but it can be added.
8. Press OK when the desired group alias is displayed. If this group is not currently in the currently selected zone’s scan list, the message Add (group alias) is displayed. If this group is already in the currently selected zone’s scan list, the message Delete (group alias) is displayed.
9. Press OK to accept the displayed message (Add or Delete). If you delete a group from the list, you will know the operation was successful when the plus sign (+) no longer appears before the alias. If you add a group to the list, you will know the operation was successful when the plus sign (+) appears immediately before the alias. If you attempt to add a group and the list is already full, the radio displays the message List Full. In such an event, you will need to delete a group from the scan list before adding a new one.
10. When you are finished, press and hold the Back key as many times as necessary to return to the desired menu.
Under what circumstances might I miss group calls that are in my scan list in Connect Plus mode?
There are circumstances under which you may miss group calls that are in your scan list. If you miss a call for one of the following reasons, it does not indicate a problem with your radio. It is normal operation of scanning in Connect Plus mode.
• The scan feature is not enabled (look for the scan icon on the screen).
• A scan list member channel has been disabled via the menu.
• You are already in an active call.
• No member of the scanned group is registered with your site (multisite systems only).
How does the radio respond if the PTT button is pressed during a scan call?
If your radio scans a call from the group scan list to select, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scan call, the radio’s operation will depend on the enabling or disabling of the scan response option during radio programming.
Scan Response Disabled: The radio abandons the scanned call and attempts to transmit to the contact for the selected channel position. After the call hang time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the scan hold timer.
Scan Response Enabled: If the PTT button is pressed during the scanned group call hang time, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. If you scan a call for a group that is not associated with a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the call hang time, you must go to the appropriate zone and select the group’s channel position to be able to respond to that group.
How do I change the priority order of a call group in the scan list?
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmissions from the call group with a higher priority when it is on another call. A tone sounds when the radio switches to the higher priority call. There are two priority levels for call groups: P1 and P2. P1 is a higher priority than P2.
If the default emergency cancel group ID is configured in the MOTOTRBO Connect Plus option card CPS, there are three priority levels for call groups: P0, P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent emergency cancel group ID and the highest priority.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Scan is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until View/Edit List is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired group is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Edit Priority is displayed, then press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the required priority level is displayed, then press OK to select. The screen displays a brief success notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon is displayed to the left of the call group.
What types of contacts are available in the radio’s address book and what are the considerations for accessing them?
Access to contact lists depends on the zone configuration:
• If only one time zone is configured in the radio, the contact list directly displays the list from the selected zone.
• If multiple zones are configured in the radio, the zone contact folder displays all zones with the same network ID as the selected zone. The user can access contacts in these zones.
The Contacts feature is your radio’s address book. Each entry is associated with an alias or ID that you use to make a call.
Each zone allows for a list of up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:
• Private Call
• Group Call
• Multigroup Call
• Site All Call Voice
• Site All Call Text
• Dispatch Call
You can add or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be done by your dealer. The encryption feature is enabled on a channel; you can make an encrypted voice call on that channel. Only a target radio with the same encryption key or the same key values and key ID as your radio can decode the transmission.
The dispatch call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatch PC via a third-party text messaging server.
How do I make a private call from Contacts?
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Contacts is displayed, then press OK to select. Entries are listed alphabetically.
3. Follow one of these steps to select the desired subscriber alias or ID:
• Select the subscriber alias directly.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired subscriber alias or ID is displayed.
• Use the Manual Dial menu:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Manual Dial is displayed, then press OK to select.
• If the subscriber ID or alias was previously dialed, it is displayed and the cursor blinks. Use the keypad to enter or edit the ID. Press OK to make the selection.
4. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
5. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The screen displays the destination alias.
6. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio user responds, the LED blinks green and the screen displays the ID of the transmitting user. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. A short tone sounds. The screen displays Call Ended.
How do I make a call using the alias search feature in Contacts?
You can also use an alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve a subscriber’s alias. This feature is only accessible through the contact list.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Contacts is displayed, then press OK to select. Entries are listed alphabetically.
3. Enter the first character of the required alias, then press the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the required alias.
4. Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) from your mouth.
5. To make the call, press the PTT button. The LED indicator turns solid green. The screen displays the destination alias.
6. Wait for the talk permit tone to end (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
7. Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed duration, the call ends. The screen displays Call Ended.
How do I add a new contact?
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Contacts is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until New Contact is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press OK to confirm.
5. Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press OK to confirm.
6. If adding a radio contact, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to the desired ringer type, then press OK to select. The radio sounds a success tone and the screen displays the message Contact Saved.
How do I enable or disable ringtones for call alerts?
You can select, enable, or disable ringtones for the call alerts you receive.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Tones/Alerts is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Tones is displayed, then press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Alert is displayed, then press OK to select. The selected tone is indicated by a checkmark icon.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired tone is displayed, then press OK to select. The checkmark icon is displayed next to the selected tone.
How do I enable or disable ringtones for private calls?
You can enable or disable ringtones for the private calls you receive.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Tones/Alerts is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Tones is displayed, then press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Private Call is displayed, then press OK to select.
The selected tone is indicated by a checkmark icon. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired tone is displayed, then press OK to select. The checkmark icon is displayed next to the selected tone.
How do I enable or disable ringtones for text messages?
You can enable or disable ringtones for the text messages you receive.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Tones/Alerts is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Tones is displayed, then press OK to select.
6. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Text Message is displayed, then press OK to select. The selected tone is indicated by a checkmark icon.
7. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired tone is displayed, then press OK to select. The checkmark icon is displayed next to the selected tone.
How do I select an alert tone type, and what are the options?
The programmed Alert Tone Type key is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to find out how your radio has been programmed.
You can program a unique vibration alert for radio calls. If All Tones is disabled, the radio displays the All Tones Disabled icon. If All Tones is enabled, the alert tone type is displayed.
The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ringer style. The radio vibrates repeatedly if it is a repetitive ringer style. When the Ring and Vibrate option is selected, the radio emits a specific ringer during an incoming radio communication (e.g., call alert or message). It resembles a positive indication tone or a missed call.
For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Alert Tone Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.
For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate feature and are not connected to a vibrating belt clip, the Alert Tone Type is automatically set to Ring. The available alert tone type options are Silent and Ring.
You can select an alert tone type by performing one of the following actions:
• Press the programmed Alert Tone Type key to access the Alert Tone Type menu.
a. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to choose Ring, Vibrate, Ring and Vibrate, or Silent, then press OK to select.
• Access this feature from the menu.
a. Press Menu to access the menu.
b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed, then press OK to select.
c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed, then press OK to select.
d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Tones/Alerts is displayed, then press OK to select.
e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to choose Alert Tone Type, then press OK to select.
f. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to choose Ring, Vibrate, Ring and Vibrate, or Silent, then press OK to select.
How do I configure the vibrate style, and what is required for it to be active?
The programmed Vibrate Style key is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to find out how your radio has been programmed.
The vibrate style is active when the vibrating belt clip is connected to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature.
You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions:
• Press the programmed Vibrate Style key to access the Vibrate Style menu.
a. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow for Short, Medium, or Long, then press OK to select.
• Access this feature from the menu.
a. Press Menu to access the menu.
b. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed, then press OK to select.
c. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed, then press OK to select.
d. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Tones/Alerts is displayed, then press OK to select.
e. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to Vibrate Style, then press OK to select.
f. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow for Short, Medium, or Long, then press OK to select.
What is the escalating alarm tone feature?
You can program the radio to emit a continuous alarm when a radio call remains unanswered. The alarm tone volume then gradually increases. This feature is called escalating warning.
How do I view recent calls from the call log?
Your radio keeps track of recent private calls you made, received, and missed. Use the call log to view and manage recent calls. The available lists are: Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Log is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired list is displayed, then press OK to select. The screen displays the most recent entry at the top of the list.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to view the list.
How do I delete a call from a call list?
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Log is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired list is displayed, then press OK to select. When you select a list and it contains no entries, the screen displays List Empty, and a low tone sounds if keypad tones are enabled.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the required alias or ID is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Delete is displayed, then press OK to select.
6. Do one of the following:
• Press OK to select Yes and delete the entry. The screen displays Entry Deleted.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until No is displayed, then press the OK key to return to the previous window.
How do I view the details of a call from a call list?
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Log is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired list is displayed, then press OK to select.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the required alias or ID is displayed, then press OK to select.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to display View Details, then press OK to select. The screen displays the call list details.
How do I respond to a Call Alert?
Sending a call alert lets a specific radio user know that you want them to call you back when they are able. This feature is accessible from the menu by going to Contacts, Manual Dial, or via the programmed One Touch Access button.
When you receive a call alert:
• A repetitive tone sounds.
• The yellow LED blinks.
• The screen displays the call alert notification list along with the caller’s alias or ID.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a call alert in one of the following ways:
• Press the PTT button and respond with a private call directly to the caller.
• Press the PTT button to continue normal group call communication. The call alert is moved to the Missed Call option in the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Call log.
How do I send a Call Alert from the contact list?
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Contacts is displayed, then press OK to select.
3. Follow one of the steps below to select the desired subscriber alias or ID:
• Select the subscriber alias directly.
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until the desired subscriber alias is displayed, then press OK to select.
• Use the Manual Dial menu:
• Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Manual Dial is displayed, then press OK to select.
• The manual text entry screen for dialing should be displayed. Enter the subscriber ID, then press OK.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Call Alert is displayed, then press OK to select. The screen displays Call Alert:
How do I send a Call Alert using the One Touch Access button?
Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a call alert to the predefined ID.
The screen displays Call Alert along with the subscriber’s alias or ID to notify you that the alert has been sent. The LED indicator turns solid green during the call alert transmission.
If acknowledgment of the call alert is received, the screen indicates Call Alert Successful.
If acknowledgment of the call alert is not received, the screen indicates Call Alert Failed.
How do I activate Mute Mode?
Mute mode offers an option for the user to mute all radio audio indicators. Once mute mode is activated, all audible indicators are disabled except for high-priority functions, such as emergency operations. When mute mode is exited, the radio resumes playing tones and audio transmissions.
Do one of the following:
• Access this feature from the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Access this feature by turning the radio face down for a moment.
Depending on the radio model, the FaceDown Mute feature can be enabled via the radio menu or by your system administrator.
What happens when Mute Mode is activated?
The following events occur when mute mode is activated:
• A success tone sounds.
• The screen displays Mute Mode Enabled.
• The red LED blinks and continues to blink until mute mode is exited.
• The screen displays Mute Mode on the home screen.
• The radio is muted.
• The mute mode timer starts for the configured duration.
The FaceDown feature is only applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models.
How do I set the Mute Mode timer?
The Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a predetermined duration by setting the mute mode timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can be between 0.5 and 6 hours. Mute mode is exited when the timer expires.
If the timer is set to 0, the radio remains in mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved face up or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
The FaceDown feature is only applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models.
1. Press Menu to access the menu.
2. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Utilities is displayed. Press OK to make the selection.
3. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Radio Settings is displayed. Press OK to make the selection.
4. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until Mute Mode is displayed. Press OK to make the selection.
5. Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the numerical value of each digit, then press OK.
How do I exit Mute Mode?
This feature can be automatically exited once the mute mode timer expires.
Perform one of the following operations to manually exit mute mode:
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Press the PTT button for any entry.
• Turn the radio face up for a moment.
The FaceDown feature is only applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e models.
The following events occur when mute mode is disabled:
• A failure tone sounds.
• The screen displays Mute Mode Disabled.
• The red LED blinking stops.
• The Mute Mode icon disappears from the home screen.
• Your radio disables mute mode and the speaker status is restored.
• If the timer has not expired, it is stopped.
Mute mode is also abandoned if the user transmits by voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
How do I use the VHF 16 emergency channel for a distress call?
If you are exposed to grave and imminent danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF channel 16 to make a distress call to nearby vessels and the Coast Guard. Transmit the following information in this order:
1. “MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”
2. “THIS IS _______________, CALL SIGN __________.” State the name of the vessel in distress three times, followed by the call sign or other vessel identification, stated three times.
3. Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of your vessel.
4. “OUR POSITION IS _______________________.” State the position of the vessel in distress using information that will help responders locate you, e.g.:
• latitude and longitude;
• bearing (state if using true or magnetic north);
• your distance from a known landmark;
• course, speed or destination of the vessel.
5. State the nature of the distress situation.
6. Specify the assistance you require.
7. State the number of persons on board the vessel and if medical assistance is needed, if applicable.
8. Mention any other information that may be useful to responders, such as vessel type, length or tonnage, hull color, etc.
9. “OVER.”
10. Wait for a response.
11. If you do not receive an immediate response, remain near the radio and repeat your transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow instructions given to you.
What is VHF Channel 9 used for?
To transmit non-commercial messages, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or docking information, use VHF channel 9.
What are the frequencies for Marine VHF band channels?
List of Marine VHF Band Channels
| Channel Number | Frequency (MHz) | |
|---|---|---|
| Transmit | Receive | |
| 1 | 156,050 | 160,650 |
| 2 | 156,100 | 160,700 |
| * | 156,150 | 160,750 |
| 4 | 156,200 | 160,800 |
| 5 | 156,250 | 160,850 |
| 6 | 156,300 | – |
| 7 | 156,350 | 160,950 |
| 8 | 156,400 | – |
| 9 | 156,450 | 156,450 |
| 10 | 156,500 | 156,500 |
| 11 | 156,550 | 156,550 |
| 12 | 156,600 | 156,600 |
| 13** | 156,650 | 156,650 |
| 14 | 156,700 | 156,700 |
| 15** | 156,750 | 156,750 |
| 16 | 156,800 | 156,800 |
| 17** | 156,850 | 156,850 |
| 18 | 156,900 | 161,500 |
| 19 | 156,950 | 161,550 |
| 20 | 157,000 | 161,600 |
| * | 157,050 | 161,650 |
| 22 | 157,100 | 161,700 |
| * | 157,150 | 161,750 |
| 24 | 157,200 | 161,800 |
| 25 | 157,250 | 161,850 |
| 26 | 157,300 | 161,900 |
| 27 | 157,350 | 161,950 |
| 28 | 157,400 | 162,000 |
| 60 | 156,025 | 160,625 |
| * | 156,075 | 160,675 |
| 62 | 156,125 | 160,725 |
| 63 | 156,175 | 160,775 |
| * | 156,225 | 160,825 |
| 65 | 156,275 | 160,875 |
| 66 | 156,325 | 160,925 |
| 67** | 156,375 | 156,375 |
| 68 | 156,425 | 156,425 |
| 69 | 156,475 | 156,475 |
| 71 | 156,575 | 156,575 |
| 72 | 156,625 | – |
| 73 | 156,675 | 156,675 |
| 74 | 156,725 | 156,725 |
| 75 | *** | *** |
| 76 | *** | *** |
| 77** | 156,875 | – |
| 78 | 156,925 | 161,525 |
| 79 | 156,975 | 161,575 |
| 80 | 157,025 | 161,625 |
| * | 157,075 | 161,675 |
| * | 157,125 | 161,725 |
| * | 157,175 | 161,775 |
| 84 | 157,225 | 161,825 |
| 85 | 157,275 | 161,875 |
| 86 | 157,325 | 161,925 |
| 87 | 157,375 | 161,975 |
| 88 | 157,425 | 162,025 |
*Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be legally used by the general public in U.S. waters.
**Low power (1 W) only.
***Guard band.
A – in the Receive column indicates a transmit-only channel.
What are the external data interface specifications (RS232, USB, SB9600)?
Technical Interface Specifications with External Data Sources
| RS232 | USB | SB9600 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Input Voltage (peak-to-peak) | 18V | 3.6V | 5V |
| Maximum Baud Rate | 28 kbit/s | 12 Mbit/s | 9.6 kbit/s |
| Impedance | 5000 ohms | 90 ohms | 120 ohms |
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD MOTOROLA MOTOTRBO XPR 7550E (01) PDF MANUAL